ABB-S4C+IRB 940 M2000 Electrical Maintenance Training Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 556
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document discusses installation and commissioning of an industrial robot.

It is an installation and commissioning manual for an IRB 940 Tricept robot.

Safety risks related to tools, pneumatic/hydraulic systems, live electric parts, and safe work practices are discussed.

Installation and Commissioning Manual

Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16638-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics S-721 68 VSTERS SWEDEN Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000 Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Installation and Commissioning Manual IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16638-1
-

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein. This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted. Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved. ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics SE-721 68 Vsters Sweden

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Overview Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept Chapter 1: Safety, service Introduction Safety, service - General
Section A: References

1 3 5 5 6
7

Limitation of Liability Applicable Safety Standards Related information


Section B: Safety risks

7 7 8
9

Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

9 9 9 10 10 11
13

Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulator's arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit Work inside the manipulators working range Chapter 2: Reference Information Introduction Screw joints Weight specifications Chapter 3: Manipulator Introduction
Section A: Unpacking

13 13 14 14 15 15 15 17 17 18 20 21 21
22

Pre-installation procedure Working range, IRB 940 Tricept Risk of tipping/Stability


Section B: On-site installation

22 26 27
28

Lifting manipulator in a horizontal orientation

28

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a trolley Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a lifting jack Manually releasing the brakes Orienting and securing the manipulator Fitting equipment on manipulator Loads
Section C: Electrical connections

31 35 39 40 44 46
47

Installation of cabling on board the manipulator Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling Connectors on the distribution box Chapter 4: Controller Introduction
Section A: Unpacking

47 49 52 53 53
54

Transporting and unpacking, S4Cplus


Section B: On-site Installation

54
56

Lifting the controller cabinet Required installation space, control cabinet Bolt pattern, control cabinet Installation of external power transformer Installation of Distributed Drive Unit (DDU)
Section C: Electrical connections

56 57 58 59 64
68

C - 1: Signal/Power cables Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, S4Cplus cabling Connectors on control cabinet, S4Cplus Connectors on distributed drive unit, DDU Connection of mains power to control cabinet, S4Cplus C - 2: Signal connections Signal Classes Selecting Cables Interference elimination Connection types Connections to screw terminals Connections to connectors C - 3: Customer connections on controller The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit External customer connections on panel X1 - X4 Connection of external safety relay

68 68 70 71 72 74 74 75 77 79 80 81 81 81 91 94

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] ii document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16638-1 The delete

Table of Contents

C - 4: Supplies External 24V supply 24V I/O supply 115/230 VAC supply C - 5: Buses Connection of the CAN bus Interbus-S, slave DSQC 351 Profibus-DP, slave DSQC 352 C - 6: I/O units Distributed I/O units Distributed I/O, digital sensors Distributed I/O, digital I/O DSQC 328 (option) AD Combi I/O, DSQC 327 (optional) Analog I/O, DSQC 355 (optional) Encoder interface unit, DSQC 354 (optional) Relay I/O, DSQC 332 (optional) Digital I/O (120 VAC), DSQC 320 (optional) C - 7: Communication Communication concept, Allen-Bradley RIO, remote I/O for Allen-Bradley PLC DSQC 350 Communication, serial links Communication, Ethernet External operators panel
Section D: Start-up

96 96 98 99 99 99 104 110 114 114 115 116 120 124 130 136 140 144 144 146 149 154 157
159

Inspection before start-up Start-up


Section E: Installation of controller software

159 160
162

Loading system software RobotWare CD-ROM Installing new Robot Controller Software with RobInstall Create a new Robot Controller System Update the Robot Controller image Transfer Robot Controller System using Ethernet connection Transfer Robot Controller System using floppy disks RobInstall preferences
Section F: Robot controller

162 164 166 168 173 175 180 182


184

BootImage Start window Reboot Window Boot Disk Window

184 185 187 188

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

iii

Table of Contents

Network Settings Window LAN Settings Window Service Settings Window System selection window How to perform a Restart How to Start in Query Mode
Section G: System directory structure

189 190 192 193 194 198


200

Media pool in the PC System pool in the PC File structure in the robot controller mass storage memory Preparation of S4Cplus software to be installed Handling mass memory storage capacity Chapter 5: Calibration When to calibrate
Section A: General

200 201 202 203 204 207 207


208

How to calibrate the robot system Calibration tool kit, contents


Section B: Preliminaries

208 210
211

Correct orientation of axes Checking the calibration position Updating the revolution counter Fine calibration procedure on TPU
Section C: Calibration

211 215 216 219


222

Directions for all axes Fine calibration, all axes


Section D: After calibration

222 224
231

Post calibration procedure

231

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] iv document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16638-1 The delete

Overview

About This Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for installing the complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during installation, from lifting the manipulator to its work site through installing application software in the robot controller, making the robot ready for operation.

Who Should Read This Manual?

This manual is intended for:


installation personnel on the installation site.

Prerequisites

The reader should...


have the required knowledge of mechanical as well as electrical installation work.

Organization of Chapters

The manual is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Contents
Safety, service Reference Information Manipulator Controller Calibration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

References Reference
Circuit diagram, Manipulator Circuit diagram, Controller

Document Id
Included in 3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual, part 2 Included in 3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual, part 2

Revisions Revision
-

Description
First edition

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 2 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16638-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists of several manuals listed below:

Overview, Installation and Commissioning Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:
Safety, Service Reference Information Unpacking On-site Installation Electrical connections Start-up Robot controller Installation of controller software System directory structure Calibration

Overview, Repair Manual

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare parts Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered spare parts Circuit Diagram for manipulator Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

Overview, Maintenance Manual

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Maintenance schedules Maintenance activities Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 4 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16638-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter Safety, service is divided into the following sections: A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability applicable safety standards referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system. The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid dangers.
Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulators arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device Work inside the manipulators working range

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards and regulations of the country where the robot is installed. The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of external safety devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral equipment as well as from the robot. In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 6 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16638-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
References

Section A: References Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:


EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles EN 775, Robot safety EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure) (EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains) EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments (EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test) (EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test) (EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields) (EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity test)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents Type of information


Installation of safety devices Changing robot modes

Detailed in document
Installation and Commissioning Manual User s Guide

Section

Start-up

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 8 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16638-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks Safety risks related to end effector


Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating. It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken. The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before starting to repair them. Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Safe design

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop. Dump valves should be used in case of emergency. Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different industrial applications. All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the applicable safety regulations. Care must be taken at all times.

Qualified personnel

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated with its different parts.

Extraordinary risks

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation and service

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning must always be followed. Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so that the robot can be stopped quickly. Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are available for the installation in question. Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

Nation/region specific regulations

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 10 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage related risks

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are suitable devices. Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the robot's working space. The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released or when the motors or other components are removed. When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling objects. Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller. Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the robot.

To be observed by the supplier of the complete system

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function. The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related risks, general

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads and disconnecting or connecting units. The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can be turned off outside the robots working space.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related risks, controller, S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:


Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller. Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power from an external source. The mains supply/mains switch The power unit The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC) The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!) The drive unit (700 VDC) The service outlets (115/230 VAC) The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the machining process The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even when the robot is disconnected from the mains. Additional connections

Voltage related risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:


The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC) The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC) The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

Voltage related risks, tools, material handling devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working process may be damaged.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 12 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:


- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made of suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces involved and appropriate materials. - insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values. Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation. - isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot (manipulator or controller)!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the brakes" in the Installation Manual. The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed below: 1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load). 2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating mode selector on the controller. 3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then the brake function is adequate.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 14 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit (TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the MOTORS OFF state. To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented: The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way. During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as there is no need for the robot to move. The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points must be observed: The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link or remote control panel. The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails. Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 16 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller. The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic materials and do not apply to soft or brittle materials. Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the tables below:

Screws with slotted or cross recess head

Dimension
M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"


0.25 0.5 1.2 2.5 5.0

Screws with hexagon socket head

Dimension
M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


6 10 24 47 82

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


28 55 95

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


17 40 70 120

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 18 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Dimension
M16

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


200

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


235

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


300

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in this way. ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 20 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator

Chapter 3:Manipulator
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter contains necessary information for installing the manipulator to the working site.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

21

Manipulator
Unpacking

Section A: Unpacking Pre-installation procedure

General

This instruction is primarily intended for use when unpacking and installing the manipulator (mechanical robot) for the first time. It also contains information useful during later re-installation of the manipulator.

Checking the prerequisites for installation

The checklist below details what must be observed before proceeding with the actual installation of the manipulator: 1. Make sure only qualified installation personnel, conforming to all national and local codes, are allowed to perform the installation. 2. Make sure the manipulator has not been damaged, by visually inspecting the manipulator and control cabinet exterior. 3. Make sure the lifting device to be used is dimensioned to handle the weight of the manipulator as stated in Weight, manipulator. 4. If the manipulator is not to be installed directly, it must be stored as in Storage conditions, manipulator. 5. Make sure the appointed operating environment of the manipulator conforms to the specifications as in Operating conditions, manipulator. 6. Before taking the manipulator to its installation site, make sure the site conforms to Loads on flange, manipulator and Protection classes. 7. Before moving the manipulator, please observe Risk of tipping/Stability regarding risk of tipping! 8. When these prerequisites have been met, the manipulator may be taken to its installation site as in Lifting manipulator in a horizontal/vertical orientation.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 22 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Unpacking

Weight, manipulator

The table below shows the weight of the manipulator:

Manipulator model
IRB 940 Tricept Distribution box

Weight
570 kg 31 kg

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

23

Manipulator
Unpacking

Loads on flange, manipulator

The table below shows the maximum forces and torques working on the manipulator during operation. NOTE! These forces and torques are extreme values that are rarely encountered during operation. The values also never reach their maximum simultaneously!

Tz

xx0200000362

Force
Force xy Force z Torque xy Torque z

Maximum stress transmitted to the mounting base


51 kN 68 kN 14 kNm 45 kNm

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 24 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Unpacking

Storage conditions, manipulator

The table below shows the allowed storage conditions for the manipulator and the distribution box:

Parameter
Min. ambient temperature, storage Max. ambient temperature, storage Max. ambient temperature, storage (less than 24 hrs) Max. ambient humidity, storage

Value
-25C +55C +55C Max. 95% at constant temperature

Operating conditions, manipulator

The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the manipulator and the distribution box:

Parameter
Min. ambient temperature, operation Max. ambient temperature, operation, manipulator Max. ambient humidity, operation

Value
+5C +45C Max. 95% at constant temperature

Note! The robot must not be operated until the internal temperature of the robot is stabilized within the prescribed operational temperature range!

Protection classes

The table below shows the protection class of the main parts of the robot system:

Equipment
Manipulator Distribution box Overpressure unit

Protection class
IP 66 IP 67 IP 67

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

25

Manipulator
Unpacking

Working range, IRB 940 Tricept

Illustration

The illustration below shows the unrestricted working range of IRB 940 Tricept:

0 400 800 1200 800 400 0 400

B A

0 400 800 800 1200 (mm) 1200 800 400 0 400

B A

800

1200 (mm)

xx0200000356

A B

Absolute Tolerance Area at the tool-coordinate system, TCP0 Working range, centre of axis 5

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 26 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Unpacking

Risk of tipping/Stability

General

The section below details how to make sure the manipulator does not tip over before it has not been safely secured to the foundation.

Stability

The figure below shows the robot in its shipping position which also is the most stable. The robot must be placed on a spacer, at least 100mm in height, in order to avoid the risk of collision with the axis 2 servomotor.

B
xx0200000357

A B

26 mm (most stable position of axes 1, 2 and 3) Spacer, min. 100 mm in height

The table below specifies the most stable position of each axis of the manipulator. Axis
1, 2, 3 4, 6 5

Position
26 mm 0 -90

Note
Shown in figure above!

1. DO NOT change the manipulator position before securing it to its foundation. The shipping position is the most stable.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

27

Manipulator
On-site installation

Section B: On-site installation Lifting manipulator in a horizontal orientation

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator in a horizontal orientation from a transportation pallet to a stand.

Required equipment Equipment


Crane or hoist 1 strap, length 2 m 2 straps, length 1 m 2 upper platform eyebolts 2 shackles

Note
Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. M16 The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the upper platform.

Lifting in horizontal orientation

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, horizontally, using the lifting equipment specified above.
The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended load!

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 28 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
1. Run the overhead crane to a position above the manipulator. Fit the 2 metre strap around the wrist unit, as shown in the adjacent figure.

Note

2.

xx0200000317

3.

Hook the strap to the lift, or crane, as shown in the adjacent figure.

xx0200000318

4.

Unless already in posiDimension specified above! tion, fit the eyebolts to the upper platform.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

29

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
5. Attach the 1 metre straps to the eyebolts using the shackles.

Note
A

C
xx0200000319

6. Attach the straps to the lift, or crane, as shown in figure above! Lift the manipulator to the required location and disconnect the lifting equipment.

A: Strap, 1 m (2 pcs) B: Shackle (2 pcs) C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 30 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a trolley

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator from a transportation pallet to a stand, after turning it into a vertical orientation. Notice that there are two different ways of turning the manipulator into a vertical orientation. The section below details a method using a trolley or a machine skate, that is used to wheel the front of the manipulator towards the centre of the lift as the manipulator is hoisted.

Required equipment Equipment


Crane or hoist 2 straps, length 2 m 2 upper platform eyebolts 2 shackles Trolley (or machine skate)

Note
Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. M16 The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the upper platform. Capacity: 500 kg. Height: 400 mm.

Lifting in vertical orientation, using a trolley

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, vertically, using the lifting equipment specified above.

The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended load!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

31

Manipulator
On-site installation

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

- Ensure that the area around the manipulator is clear as the machine can swing round as it leaves the pallet! - Ensure that the trolley has free movement while lifting. If the trolley gets stuck, the manipulator is likely to fall off and can cause personal injury and damage to the manipulator!

Step Action
1. Unless already in position, fit the eyebolts to the upper platform. Attach the 2 metre straps to the eyebolts using the shackles.

Note
Dimension specified above!

2.

C
xx0200000320

3. Attach the straps to the lift, or crane, as shown in figure above!

A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs) B: Shackle (2 pcs) C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 32 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
4. Place the trolley under the wrist unit and guide it into the correct position as the manipulator is lifted, as shown in the adjacent figure.

Note

A B

C E
xx0200000321

D
A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs) B: Wrist unit C: Trolley D: 125 mm E: 400 mm

5.

When the wrist is resting squarely on the trolley it is safe to continue lifting it off the pallet, as shown in the adjacent figure. Note! Exercise extreme care when lowering the wrist unit on to the trolley. Dropping the manipulator onto the trolley can cause damage to the manipulator and/or affect the calibration of the tripod.

xx0200000322

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

33

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
6. As the manipulator is lifted off the pallet, carefully remove the pallet to allow free movement of the trolley towards the centre of the lift, as shown in the adjacent figure.

Note

xx0200000323

7.

Continue lifting the manipulator until it leaves the trolley and is hanging vertically, as shown in the adjacent figure.

xx0200000324

8.

Lift the manipulator and move it to the required location.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 34 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Lifting manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a lifting jack

General

The section below details how to lift the manipulator from a transportation pallet to a stand, after turning it into a vertical orientation. Notice that there are two different ways of turning the manipulator into a vertical orientation. The section below details a method using a lifting jack.

Required equipment Equipment


Crane or hoist 2 straps, length 2 m 1 strap, length 1 m 2 upper platform eyebolts 2 shackles Lifting jack

Note
Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg. M16 The shackles must fit the eyebolts on the upper platform. Lifting capacity: 1000 kg.

Lifting in vertical orientation, using a lifting jack

The section below details how to lift and move the manipulator from the transportation pallet, vertically, using the lifting equipment specified above.

The IRB 940 manipulator weighs 570 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

No personnel must under any circumstances be present under the suspended load!

Failure to attach the straps correctly can cause the suspended load to tilt suddenly and cause both personal injury and severe damage to the load.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

35

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
1.

Note

Unless already in posi- Dimension specified above! tion, fit the eyebolts to the upper platform. Attach the 2 metre straps to the eyebolts using the shackles.

2.

C
xx0200000320

3. Attach the straps to the lift, or crane, as shown in figure above.

A: Strap, 2 m (2 pcs) B: Shackle (2 pcs) C: Eyebolt (2 pcs)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 36 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
4. Attach the 1 metre strap to the wrist as shown in the adjacent figure.

Note

xx0200000317

5.

Connect one end of the Dimension specified above! lifting jack to the strap around the wrist and B the other to the lift, or crane. Adjust the length so that the lifting jack is tightened, as shown in the adjacent figure. A

xx0200000325

6. Lift the whole manipulator using the lift, or crane, away from the pallet and remove the pallet.

A: Strap around wrist unit B: Crane

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

37

Manipulator
On-site installation

Step Action
7. Lower the wrist end of the manipulator using the lifting jack. When the wrist gets near the floor, raise the whole manipulator further, as shown in the adjacent figure. Repeat until the manipulator hangs vertically.

Note

xx0200000326

8.

Remove the lifting jack and lift the manipulator to the required location.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 38 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Manually releasing the brakes

General

The section below details how to release the holding brakes of each axis motor. This may be done by:
using push-buttons on the distribution box (internal brake release unit). This requires either that the controller is connected to the power supply or that the R1.MP connector (at the distribution box) is supplied with +24 V on R1.MP.B16 and 0 V on B14 or B15.

Supplying power on the wrong pin may cause all brakes on the manipulator to be released!

Internal brake release unit

This section details how to release the holding brakes using the internal brake release unit.
When releasing the holding brakes, the manipulator axes may move very quickly and sometimes in unexpected ways! Make sure no personnel is near the manipulator arm!

Step Action
1.

Info/Illustration

The push-button unit is equipped with six but- The push-button unit is tons for controlling the axis brakes. The but- located on the outside of tons are numbered with the axes numbers. the distribution box. Release the holding brake on a particular manipulator axis by pressing the appropriate button on the internal brake release panel. The brake will function again as soon as the button is released.

2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

39

Manipulator
On-site installation

Orienting and securing the manipulator

General

This section details how to orient and secure the manipulator at the stand in order to run the robot safely. The cable harness should be installed in the stand before the manipulator is mounted to it. Installation of the cabling is described in chapter "Electrical connections".

Attachment screws

The table below specifies the type of securing screws and washers to be used for securing the manipulator to the foundation. Securing screws are included in the delivery of the manipulator.

Suitable screws, lightly lubricated Quality Suitable washer Tightening torque

MC6S, M16 x 55 Quality 8.8 Thickness: 4 mm 200 Nm

A locating pin may be used in the mounting flange, when necessary. The dimension for the attachment hole is detailed in part "Hole configuration, mounting flange".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 40 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Illustration, securing manipulator at stand

The figure below shows how to mount the manipulator to a stand. The figure shows prepared cabling in the stand.

xx0200000348

A B C

Manipulator attachment bolts Centering ring Mounting flange

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

41

Manipulator
On-site installation

Securing the manipulator

This section details how to secure the manipulator to the stand in a vertical position, after fitting the stand to the foundation.

Step
1.

Action

Info/Illustration

Lift and turn the manipulator to vertical orien- Detailed in "Lifting the tation. manipulator in a vertical orientation, using a trolley/lifting jack". Move the manipulator to the vicinity of its installation location. Pull the cabling through the stand and through the centering ring. Fit the ring to the stand. Guide the manipulator gently while lowering it into its mounting position. Make sure the manipulator mounting flange is correctly fitted onto the centering ring! If necessary, use a locating pin in the flange. Fit the 8 bolts and washers in the mounting flange attachment holes. Shown in figure above!

2. 3.

4.

Shown in figure above! Location of the attachment hole for the pin is shown in part "Hole configuration, mounting flange". Specified in "Attachment screws". Shown in figure above! Note! Lightly lubricate the bolts before assembly!

5.

6.

Tighten the bolts in a criss-cross pattern to ensure that the flange is not distorted.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 42 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Hole configuration, mounting flange

The illustration below shows the hole configuration used when securing the manipulator. Note that the holes are not equally spaced on the flange.

A-A (400) 350 53 86.5 C C-C

18 Through 8x)

C 10 H8 Through 87.5 xx0200000358

3 6

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

43

Manipulator
On-site installation

Fitting equipment on manipulator

General

The manipulator features mounting holes for additional equipment.

Illustration, fitting of extra equipment on upper platform

The illustration below shows the mounting holes available for fitting extra equipment on the upper platform.

309.5

x M8x12 Deep

xx0200000360

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 44 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
On-site installation

Illustration, fitting on mounting flange

The illustration below shows the mounting holes available for fitting equipment on the mounting flange.

xx0200000359

Fastener quality

When fitting tools on the mounting flange (see the figure above), use only screws with quality 12.9. When fitting other equipment, standard screws with quality 8.8 can be used. A guiding pin may be used when fitting equipment on to the tool flange. Attach the pin to the extra equipment using a press fit, in order to make sure that the pin remains in the equipment when removing it from the flange.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

45

Manipulator
On-site installation

Loads

General

Any loads mounted on the manipulator must be defined correctly and carefully (with regard to the position of centre of gravity and inertia factor) in order to avoid jolting movements and overloading the motors. If this is not done correctly operational stops may result.

References

Load diagrams, permitted extra loads (equipment) and their positions are specified in the Product Specification. The loads must also be defined in the software as detailed in the Users Guide.

Brake performance

Manipulator motor brake performance depends on any loads attached. For further information about brake performance, please contact ABB Robotics.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 46 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Section C: Electrical connections Installation of cabling on board the manipulator

General

The manipulator is connected to the control cabinet via a distribution box, after mounting it on the stand. The section below describes how to install the cabling on board the manipulator. All the necessary cabling is included in the delivery of the robot but must be connected both to the manipulator and to the distribution box. All cabling is specified in the part "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator (/controller) cabling" The figure below shows how the cabling is installed to the manipulator.

xx0200000349

Cabling in one of the two grooves in the upper platform

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

47

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Installation of cabling on board the manipulator

Step
1.

Action
Attach the cables, axes 1-2-3, with straps in the cable grooves on the upper platform, as shown in the figure above. The cabling is marked with a red ring at the correct attachment point. The ring is then located behind the straps. When installing the cabling in the robot it is very important to adjust its looseness correctly.

Note/Illustration

2.

Connect the cables, axes 1-2-3, Connection points detailed in "Conto the motors of axes 1-2-3. Fit the necting the manipulator to the concables to the brackets mounted trol cabinet, manipulator cabling". nearby the motors and secure with straps. Fit the cables, axis 4-5-6, inside the cable chain. Connect the cables on top of the housing, at the upper end of the center unit. Fasten the cable chain with attachment screws in the cable bracket at axis 2 and at top of the housing. Connection points detailed in "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling".

3. 4.

5.

4x

4x

xx0200000428

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 48 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, manipulator cabling

General

The manipulator is to be connected to the control cabinet via a distribution box, after mounted to the stand. This section specifies the cabling to be used and their connection points. How to install the manipulator cables on board the manipulator is detailed in the part "Installation of cabling on board the manipulator".

Main cable categories Cable category


Manipulator cables

Description
The cables between the distribution box and the manipulator motors are specially manufactured with extra strong screening. The cabling for each motor consists of two separate cables, one power cable and one signal cable. The cabling contains conductors for: The power cable contains conductors for: Motor phases Earth connection Motor brake Motor temperature sensors

The signal cable contains conductors for: Resolvers Distribution box cables Handles power supply to and control of the manipulator's motors as well as feedback from the serial measurement board.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

49

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Manipulator cables

The manipulator cables are included in the standard delivery. They are completely pre-manufactured and ready to plug in. The cabling transfers drive power and resolver data for drive and control of the six axes.

Cable sub-category
Manipulator cable, power, axis 1 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 1 Manipulator cable, power, axis 2 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 2 Manipulator cable, power, axis 3 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 3 Manipulator cable, power, axis 4 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 4 Manipulator cable, power, axis 5 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 5 Manipulator cable, power, axis 6 Manipulator cable, signal, axis 6

Connection point, Connection point, distribution box manipulator


XM1 XR1 XM2 XR2 XM3 XR3 XM4 XR4 XM5 XR5 XM6 XR6 XM1.1 XR1.1 XM2.1 XR2.1 XM3.1 XR3.1 XM4.1 XR4.1 XM5.1 XR5.1 XM6.1 XR6.1

Distribution box cables

These cables are included in the standard delivery. They are completely pre-manufactured and ready to plug in.

Cable subcategory
Distribution box cable, power

Description
Transfers drive power from the drive units in the control cabinet to the manipulators distribution box.

Connection Connection point, point, cabinet distribution box


XS1 R1.MP

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 50 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Cable subcategory
Distribution box cable, signals

Description

Connection Connection point, point, cabinet distribution box


R1.SMB

Transfers resolver XS2 data from the serial measurement board and power supply to the SMB in the distribution box.

Distribution box cable, power Cable


Distribution box cable, power, 7 m Distribution box cable, power, 15 m Distribution box cable, power, 30 m

Article number
3HAC 11818-1 3HAC 11818-2 3HAC 11818-4

Distribution box cable, signals Cable


Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 7 m Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 15 m Distribution box cable, signal, shielded, 30 m

Article number
3HAC 7998-1 3HAC 7998-2 3HAC 7998-4

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

51

Manipulator
Electrical connections

Connectors on the distribution box

General

Section "Connecting the distribution box to the control cabinet" specifies which cables to use in order to connect the manipulators distribution box to the controller.

Connectors on the distribution box

All distribution box connectors are shown in the figure below.

R1.MP

R1.SMB

XM4 XM1 XM5 XM2 XM6 XM3 XR1 XR2 XR3 XR4 XR5 XR6

xx0200000430

The connectors on the controller cabinet are located as detailed in part "Connectors on the controller cabinet, S4CPlus".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 52 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller

Chapter 4:Controller
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter contains necessary information for installing the controller to the working site.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

53

Controller
Unpacking

Section A: Unpacking Transporting and unpacking, S4Cplus

General

Before starting to unpack and install the robot system, read the safety regulations and other instructions very carefully. These are found in separate sections in the User s Guide and Product manual. The installation must be done by qualified installation personnel and should conform to all national and local codes. When you have unpacked the cabinet, check that it has not been damaged during transport or while unpacking.

Weight, controller cabinet

The table below shows the weights for the controller cabinet:

Controller
S4Cplus controller cabinet Distributed Drive Unit (option)

Weight
240 kg 30 kg

Storage conditions, controller cabinet

The table below shows the allowed storage conditions for the controller:

Parameter
Min. ambient temperature Max. ambient temperature Max. ambient humidity

Value
-25C +55C Max. 95% at constant temperature

Max. ambient temperature (less than 24 h) +70C

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 54 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Unpacking

The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the controller: Operating conditions, controller cabinet

Parameter
Min. ambient temperature Max. ambient temperature Max. ambient humidity

Value
+5C +45C Max. 95% at constant temperature

Protection class, controller

The table below shows the protection class of the controller:

Equipment
Control cabinet Programming unit Distributed Drive Unit (option)

Protection class
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

55

Controller
On-site Installation

Section B: On-site Installation Lifting the controller cabinet

Lifting device

Use the four lifting devices on the cabinet or a fork lift when lifting the controller cabinet S4Cplus as shown below. The figure below shows the minimum angle between the lifting straps and the cabinet when lifting the controller.

B
xx0100000153

A B

Min. 60when lifting with straps Fork lift

Cabinet delivered without top cover

If the controller is delivered without its top cover, a fork lift must be used. Do not use lifting devices!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 56 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Required installation space, control cabinet

Dimensions

The figure below shows the required installation space for the S4CPlus control cabinet:
A

200

200

800

800

820

950 980*

500 70 620

xx0100000156

A B *

Air distance to wall Cabinet extension (Option 124) Castor wheels (Option 126)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

57

Controller
On-site Installation

Bolt pattern, control cabinet

Dimensions

The figure below shows the bolt pattern for the S4CPlus control cabinet:

720

400

xx0100000157

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 58 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Installation of external power transformer

Location of external power transformer

The external power transformer (option) is located outside the controller as shown in the figure below:

B A

xx0100000154

A B

Cable glands for input and output cables (large gland; input cable, small gland; output cable) Locking screws/lifting lugs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


External power transformer unit Input cables Output cables

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 11668-1

Note

Rec. 16 mm 2 Rec. 6 mm 2

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

59

Controller
On-site Installation

Equipment, etc.
Fuse and holder

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
Mains voltage 200 VAC: 63 A Mains voltage 600 VAC: 25 A Dimensioned for the expected currents

Circuit breaker

Standard toolkit

3HAC 15571-1

The contents are defined in section "Standard toolkit"! These procedures include references to the tools required.

Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below. Circuit Diagram, controller Circuit Diagram, external power transformer 3HAC 5582-2 3HAC 11668-11

Connections

The procedure below details how to connect the external power transformer unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action
Connect the shop mains power supply Connect the external power transformer input.

Note/Illustration
Detailed in "Shop mains power supply" below! Detailed in "Transformer input" below!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 60 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Step
3. 4.

Action

Note/Illustration

Connect the external power transformer out- Detailed in "Transformer put. output" below! Connect the controller input. Detailed in "Controller input" below!

Shop mains power supply

The procedure below details how to connect the Shop mains power supply.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Make sure the shop supply is fitted with suit- Fuse size specified in the able circuit breakers and fuses. table above!

Transformer input

The procedure below details how to connect the Transformer input.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Run a cable from the shop supply outlet through the input cable inlet on the transformer unit.

Note/Illustration
Shown in the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

61

Controller
On-site Installation

Step
2. 3. 4.

Action
Open the transformer unit by removing the lock screws on top of the unit. Connect the input cable earth conductor to the earth terminal.

Note/Illustration
Shown in the figure above!

Connect the three input phases to the long Terminal: X1 terminal. Make sure the cables are connected to the terminals marked with the voltage value corresponding to the voltage supplied. Make sure all terminals are tightened to ensure good electric contact. Tightening torque: approx. 2 Nm

5.

Transformer output

The procedure below details how to connect the Transformer output.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Run a cable from the transformer unit through Shown in the figure the output cable outlet to the robot controller. above! Connect the output cable earth conductor to the transformer unit earth terminal. Connect the three output phases to the output terminals. The terminals are marked with "475" for the output voltage. Make sure all terminals are tightened to ensure good electric contact. Terminals: X1.1, X1:2 and X1:3

4.

Tightening torque: approx. 2 Nm

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 62 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Controller input

The procedure below details how to connect the Controller input.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Remove the left cover plate under the robot controller top lid. Route the transformer output cable through the gland located on the left cabinet wall. Connect the cable inside the robot controller (not dependent on phase sequence): Phase 1 to L1 Phase 2 to L2 Phase 3 to L3 0 to XT26.N Earth to the cabinet earth connection (C in the figure). The earth connection is marked with a "PE" sticker.

Note/Illustration

2.

3.

A B C D

xx0100000155

A: Terminal X26 B: Connectors C: Earth connection (PE) D: Cable glands

4.

Make sure all terminals are Tightening torque: approx. 2 Nm tightened to ensure good electric contact.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

63

Controller
On-site Installation

Installation of Distributed Drive Unit (DDU)

Required installation space, DDU

The external DDU (option) is located outside the control cabinet. The figure below shows the required installation space for the DDU.

300

xx0200000340

50 mm, required free area for the exhaust air

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 64 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Bolt pattern, DDU

The DDU is to be suspended nearby the control cabinet, using the bolt pattern shown in the figure below.

260
xx0200000374

Connection to earth

If the difference of potential between the control system and the DDU is too large or there are suspicions of shorter drops in voltage, the DDU must be connected to earth. This is done at the connection point GND (see the part "Connectors on the DDU").

Fan cooling

The main power from the control cabinet also feeds two fans in the DDU via an internal transformer with three input taps. The transformer wires are connected as
0 - 400V for nominal mains input 400V 0 - 440V for nominal mains input 440V 0 - 480V for nominal mains input 480V

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

65

Controller
On-site Installation

Overheating

Overheating of the DDU may be caused by the following:


A line voltage lower than 480V is used, while the fans are connected as 480V. This causes a reduced fan cooling. See Changing the connection of the transformer below. The fuse, located at the screw terminal, has caused the fans to stop. Insufficient airflow. See Increasing the airflow below. Too heavy drive at too high ambient temperature. See the manual External axes.

Changing the connection of the transformer

The default connection of the transformer is the nominal mains input 480V. The cooling is, however, reduced, when a lower line voltage is used and there may be a risk that the drive unit is triggered at a high surrounding temperature. Therefore, if the line voltage differs from 480V, it is recommended to switch over the default connection to 440V or 400V instead. To change the voltage, remove the lid of the DDU and switch the connections on the screw terminals (see the part "Connections to screw terminals").

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 66 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
On-site Installation

Increasing the airflow

If there appears to be an overheating of the DDU, without suspicion of reduced fan cooling, the airflow may be increased by replacing the two covering plates with vents, see figure below. This gives four openings instead of the normal two.

B A

xx0200000373

A B

Vent Covering plate

Cabling

Section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the DDU to either the controller, the manipulator or to the external axis.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

67

Controller
Electrical connections

Section C: Electrical connections C - 1: Signal/Power cables Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet, S4Cplus cabling

General

Connect the manipulator and control cabinet to each other after securing them to the foundation. The lists below specify which customer cables to be used. Manipulator cabling is specified in chapter Manipulator, section Electrical connections.

Customer cables

These cables are not included in the standard delivery, but are included in the delivery of each specific option. The cables are not ready to plug in, but require connection to terminals inside the control cabinet as well as keying. These activities are detailed in Customer Connection Kit. Connection Connection point, point, cabinet manipulator
XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 XS6 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 XS6 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 XS6 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 DP/M XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 DP/M R1.CP/CS

Cable
Fieldbus cable, CAN, 7 m

Art. no.
3HAC 13173-1

Fieldbus cable, CAN, 15 m

3HAC 13173-2

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, CAN, 30 m

3HAC 13173-4

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 7 m

3HAC 13174-1

R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 15 m 3HAC 13174-2

R1.CP/CS

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 68 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Cable

Art. no.

Connection Connection point, point, cabinet manipulator


XT/XP5.1 XT/XP6 DP/M XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 XT/XP5.1 XT/XP5.2 XT/XP6.1 XS13 R1.CP/CS

Fieldbus cable, Profibus, 30 m 3HAC 13174-4

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 7 m

3HAC 14890-4

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 15 m

3HAC 14890-1

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, CAN, 30 m

3HAC 14890-6

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 7 m 3HAC 15644-4

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 15 m

3HAC 15644-1

R1.CP/CS

Harness CP/CS, Interbus, 30 m

3HAC 15644-5

R1.CP/CS

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

69

Controller
Electrical connections

Connectors on control cabinet, S4Cplus

General

Section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the controller to the manipulator.

Connections to the cabinet

All control cabinet connectors are shown in the figure below.

xx0100000247

* **

For 6400S/640 and Can Bus Option for 66X0 and 7600

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 70 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connectors on distributed drive unit, DDU

General

The section "Connecting the manipulator to the control cabinet" specifies which cables to use and to which connectors these are to be connected, in order to connect the DDU (distributed drive unit) to either the controller, the manipulator or to the external axis.

Connections to the DDU

All DDU connectors are shown in the figure below.

S77

XS78 GND

XP40

XP49

xx0200000372

The connections on the manipulator are located on the rear of the robot base.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

71

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of mains power to control cabinet, S4Cplus

General

Connect the power supply either inside the cabinet, or to a optional socket on the left-hand side of the cabinet or the lower section of the front. The cable connector is supplied but not the cable. Dimension the mains supply cables and fuses in accordance with the rated power and line voltage, see rating plate on the controller.

Connections to the mains switch

Also see the Circuit Diagram. The instruction below details how to make all the required connections to the mains switch:

C D
xx0100000248

A B C D

XT 26 Protective Earth connection Cable gland Connector

Step
1.

Action
Remove the left cover plate under the top lid.

Info/Illustration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 72 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Step
2.

Action
Pull the mains cable (outer diam. 10.2 mm) through the gland located on the left cabinet wall. Release the connector from the knob by pushing the release buttons located on the side of the connector. Connect phase: 1 to L1 (Not dependent on phase sequence) 2 to L2 3 to L3 0 to XT26.N (line neutral is needed only for option 432) and protective earth to the protective earth connection.

Info/Illustration
Shown in the figure above!

3.

4.

Shown in the figure above! NOTE! Max. conductor size is 6 mm2 (AWG 10). Tighten to a torque of 2.3-2.5 Nm. Retighten after approx. 1 week.

5.

Snap the breaker on to the knob again and check that it is fixed properly in the correct position. Tighten the cable gland. Fasten the cover plate.

6. 7.

Connection through a power socket

It is possible to connect the mains supply via an industrial Harting connector (DIN 41 640). See the figure below: Cable connectors are supplied (option 132 - 134).

A
xx0100000162

DIN connector

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

73

Controller
Electrical connections

C - 2: Signal connections Signal Classes

Overview

Different rules apply to the different classes when selecting and laying cable. Signals from different classes must not be mixed.

Signals

Power Signals: Supplies external motors and brakes. Control signals: Digital operating and data signals (digital I/O, safety stops, etc.). Measuring signals: Analog measuring and control signals (resolver and analog I/O). Data communication signals: Gateway (Field bus) connection, computer link.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 74 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Selecting Cables

Controller cables:

All cables laid in the controller must be capable of withstanding +70C.

Power Signal:

Shielded cable with an area of at least 0.75mm 2 or AWG 18.


Note that any local standards and regulations concerning insulation and area must always be complied with.

Control signals:

Shielded cables.

Measuring signals:

Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors.

Data communication signals:

Shielded cable with twisted pair conductors.

A specific cable should be used for Gateway (Field bus) connections.

CAN bus with DeviceNet for distributing I/O units:

A thin cable according to DeviceNet specification release 1.2, must be used, e.g. ABB article no. 3HAB 8277-1. The cable is shielded and has four conductors, two for electronic supply and two for signal transmission.
Note that a separate cable for suppling I/O loads is required.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

75

Controller
Electrical connections

Allen-Bradley Remote I/O:

Cables according to Allen-Bradley specification, e.g. "Blue hose", should be used for connections between DSQC 350 and the Allen-Bradley PLC bus.

Interbus-S:

Cables according to Phoenix specification, e.g. "Green type", should be used for connections between the DSQC 351 and external Interbus-S bus.

Profibus DP:

Cables according to Profibus DP specification should be used for connections between the I/O unit DSQC 352 and the external Profibus DP bus.

Ethernet:

Shielded twisted pair conductors (10 Base T STP).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 76 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Interference elimination

External units

External relay coils, solenoids, and other units that will be connected to the controller must be neutralized. The figure below illustrates how this can be done.
The turn-off time for DC relays increases after neutralization, especially if a diode is connected across the coil. Varistors give shorter turn-off times. Neutralizing the coils lengthens the life of the switches that control them.

Clamping with a diode

The diode should be dimensioned for the same current as the relay coil, and a voltage of twice the supply voltage.
+24V 0V

xx0100000163

Clamping with a varistor

The varistor should be dimensioned for the same current as the relay coil, and a voltage of twice the supply voltage.
+24V 0V

xx0100000164

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

77

Controller
Electrical connections

Clamping with an RC circuit

R 100 ohm, 1W C 0.1 - 1 mF. >500V max. voltage, 125V nominal voltage.
+24V DC, or AC voltage R C 0V

xx0100000165

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 78 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection types

General

I/O, external emergency stops, safety stops, etc. can be supplied on screw connections or as industrial connectors.

Connections Designation
X(T) XP XS

Connection type
Screw terminal Pin (male) Sockets (female)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

79

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections to screw terminals

Overview

This section describes how to connect conductors to screw terminals. Detailed information about connection location and functions will be found in the circuit diagram (Service Manual).

Installation

The installation should comply with the IP54 (NEMA 12) protective standard. 1. Bend unused conductors backwards and attach them to the cable using a clasp, or similar.
To prevent interference, ensure that unused conductors are not connected at the other end of the cable (antenna effect). In environments with much interference, disconnected conductors should be grounded (0V) at both ends.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 80 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections to connectors

Location of connectors

If ordered, industrial connectors can be found on the left-hand side or front of the control cabinet (depending on the customer order). Also see the figure in section "Connectors on control cabinet"! The manipulator arm (not IRB 940 Tricept) is equipped with round Burndy/Framatome connectors (customer connector not included).

Connectors, description

Each industrial connector has accommodation for four rows of 16 conductors with a maximum conductor area of 1.5 mm 2. The pull-relief clamp must be used when connecting the shield to the case.

Making the connection

The section below details how to crimp cable connections to pins: 1. Using a special crimp tool, crimp a pin or socket on to each non-insulated conductor.
When two conductors are be connected to the same pin or socket, both of them must be crimped into the same pin or socket. A maximum of two conductors may be crimped into the same pin or socket.

2. Snap the pin into the connector housing. 3. Push the pin into the connector until it locks. 4. A special extractor tool must be used when removing pins or sockets from industrial connectors.

C - 3: Customer connections on controller The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Outline diagram

The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit is made up of two identical chains of switches. The diagram shows the available customer connections, AS, GS and ES.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

81

Controller
Electrical connections

A E C B D

G H J R K S T

L
xx0100000174

N P

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S

ES (emergency stop) LS (Limit switch) Solid state switches Contactor Mains Drive unit Second chain interlock GS (general mode safeguarded space stop) AS (Automatic mode safeguarded space stop) ED (TPU enabling device) Manual mode Motor Automatic mode Operating mode selector RUN EN1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 82 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

EN2

Function of the MOTORS ON/ MOTORS OFF circuit

The circuit monitors all safety related equipment and switches. If any of the switches is opened, the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit switches the power to the motors off. As long as the two chains are not identical, the robot will remain in MOTORS OFF mode.

Connection of safety chains

The diagram below shows the two-channel safety chain. The supply from internal 24V (X3/X4:12) and 0 V (X3/X4:7) is displayed. For an external supply of GS and AS, X3/X4:10,11 is connected to 24V and X3/X4:8,9 is connected to external 0V. Connection tables for X1-X4 are given in "External customer connections on panel X1 - X4".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

83

Controller
Electrical connections

24V X3:12 X4:12

Ext LIM1 24V X1:11 12 ES1 Opto GS1 isol. TPU En1 Opto AS1 isol. Auto1 External contactors 0V 24 V 0V X3:3 X4:3 4 4 CONT1 CONT2 Man1

K1 0V

X3:10 8 11 9

&

EN Run Intern locking

K1 K2

Ext LIM2 X2:11 12

K2

24 V

X4:10 8 11 9 Opto AS2 isol.

ES2 Opto GS2 isol. TPU En2

Drive Unit

&
Man2

Auto2
xx0100000166

Technical data per chain


Limit switch External connectors GS/AS load at 24 V GS/AS closed "1" GS/AS open "0" External supply of GS/AS Load: 300 mV Max. voltage drop: 1 V Load: 10 mA Max. voltage drop: 4 V 25 mA >18 V <5V Max. + 35 VDC Min. - 35 VDC

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 84 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Technical data per chain


Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing and other signal groups Signal class 300 V Control signals

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

85

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of ES1/ES2 on panel unit

The diagram below shows the terminals for the emergency circuits. The supply from internal 24V (X1/X2:10) and 0V (X1/X2:10) is displayed. For an ext. supply, X1/X2:3 is connected to ext. 24V and X1/X2:8 is connected to ext. 0V (dotted lines).
A 24V 0V B 1:4 X1:10 X1:3 X1:7 X1:9 X1:8 X1:1 X1:2 24V C D

X1:6 E 24V

G 24V 0V B 2:4 C D X2:7 X2:8 X2:1 X2:2 24V

X2:6 H 24V X2:4 X2:5 J


xx0100000191

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 86 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

A B C D E F G H J

Internal Ext shop TPU Cabinet ES1 internal Run chain 1 top Internal ES2 internal Run chain 2 top

Technical data
ES1 and ES2 max output voltage ES1 and ES2 max output current 120 VAC or 48 VDC 120 VAC: 4 A 48 VDC L/R: 50 mA 24 VDC L/R: 2 A 24 VDC R load: 8 A Min. 22 V between terminals X1:9, 8 and X2:9, 8 respectively 40 mA 300 V Control signals

External supply of ES relay Rated current per chain Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing and other signal groups Signal class

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

87

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to MOTORS ON/ MOTORS OFF contactor

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.
A B

X3:2 1 X4:2 1
xx0100000193

A B

K1 (Motor on/off 1) K1 (Motor on/off 2)

Technical data
Max. voltage Max. current Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing and other signal groups Signal class 48 VDC 4A 300 V Control signals

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 88 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to operating mode selector

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.

S1.1.x1 8 A 7 6 B D 5 S1.1.x1 4 3 2 E
xx0100000197

A B C D E F

Auto 1 MAN1 100% (Option) Auto 2 MAN2 100% (Option)

Technical data
Max. voltage Max. current Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing and other signal groups Signal class 48 VDC 4A 300 V Control signals

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

89

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection to brake contactor

The diagram below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.
A

X4:5 6

xx0100000199

K3 (Brake)

Technical data
Max. voltage Max. current Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing and other signal groups Signal class 48 VDC 4A 300 V Control signals

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 90 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

External customer connections on panel X1 - X4

Outline diagram

The diagram shows the customer connections X1 - X4 located on the panel unit.
WARNING
REMOVE JUMPERS BEFORE CONNECTING ANY EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

xx0100000205

grey field

Jumper

Connection of X1: 12-pole type Phoenix COMBICON connector

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X1. The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal
ES1 out: A ES1 out: B ES1 top 24 V panel Run ch1 top ES1 internal Sep. ES1: A Sep. ES1: B

Terminal no. Comment


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Emergency stop out chain 1 Emergency stop out chain 1 Top of emergency stop chain 1 + 24 V emergency stop chain 1 and run chain 1 Top of run chain 1 Internal signal from emergency stop relay chain 1 Separated emergency stop chain 1 Separated emergency stop chain 1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

91

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal
ES1 bottom 0V Ext. LIM1: A Ext. LIM1: B

Terminal no. Comment


9 10 11 12 Bottom of emergency stop chain 1 0 V emergency stop chain 1 External limit switch chain 1 External limit switch chain 1

Connection of X2: 12-pole type Phoenix COMBICON connector

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X2. The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal
ES2 out: A ES2 out: B ES2 top 0V Run ch2 top ES2 internal Sep. ES2: A Sep. ES2: B ES2 bottom 24 V panel Ext. LIM2: A Ext. LIM2: B

Terminal no. Comment


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Emergency stop out chain 2 Emergency stop out chain 2 Top of emergency stop chain 2 0 V emergency stop chain 2 Top of run chain 2 Internal signal from emergency stop relay chain 2 Separated emergency stop chain 2 Separated emergency stop chain 2 Bottom of emergency stop chain 2 + 24 V emergency stop chain 1 and run chain 2 External limit switch chain 2 External limit switch chain 2

Connection of X3: 12-pole type Phoenix COMBICON connector

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X3. The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

Terminal no. Comment


Motor contactor 1 Motor contactor 1

Ext. MON 1: A 1 Ext. MON 1: B 2

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 92 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal
0V CONT1

Terminal no. Comment


3 4 5 6 External contactor 1 0 V External contactor 1 No connection No connection 0 V to auto stop (AS) and general stop (GS) General stop minus chain 1 Auto stop minus chain 1 General stop plus chain 1 Auto stop plus chain 1 24 V to auto stop and general stop

0V GS1AS1GS1+ AS1+ 24 V panel

7 8 9 10 11 12

Connection of X4: 12-pole type Phoenix COMBICON connector

The table below shows the signal descriptions for X4. The signal names refer to the Circuit Diagram.

Signal

Terminal no. Comment


Motor contactor 2 Motor contactor 2 External contactor 2 24 V External contactor 2 Contactor for external brake Contactor for external brake 0 V to auto stop (AS) and general stop (GS) General stop minus chain 2 Auto stop minus chain 2 General stop plus chain 2 Auto stop plus chain 2 24 V to auto stop and general stop

Ext. MON 2: A 1 Ext. MON 2: B 2 24 V panel CONT2 3 4

Ext. BRAKE A 5 Ext. BRAKE B 6 0V GS2AS2GS2+ AS2+ 24 V panel 7 8 9 10 11 12

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

93

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of external safety relay

Description

The motor contactors K1 and K2 in the controller can operate with external equipment if external relays are used. The figure below shows two examples of how to connect the external safety relays:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 94 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection examples

X4:4 CONT 2 24 V X4:3 E xt MON 2 X4:2 K2 X4:1 X3:2 K1 E xt MON 1 X3:1 0 V X3:3 CONT 1 X3:4

0V

24 V

E AS F E K H J
xx0100000246

GS F

AS

GS G

Panel unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

95

Controller
Electrical connections

B C D E F G H J K

Relays with positive action Robot 1 Robot 2 External supply ES (emergency stop) out Safety relay To other equipment Safety gate Cell ES (emergency stop)

C - 4: Supplies External 24V supply

When is an external supply recommended?

An external supply is recommended to make use of the advantages offered by the galvanic insulation on the I/O units or on the panel unit. An external supply must be used in the following cases:
When the internal supply is insufficient When the emergency stop circuits must be independent of whether or not the robot has power on, for example. When there is a risk that major interference can be carried over into the internal 24V supply.

How to connect the external supply

The external supply neutral wire must be connected to the chassis such that the maximum permitted potential difference in the chassis earth is not exceeded. For example, a neutral wire can be connected to the chassis earth of the controller, or some other common earthing point.

Technical data
Potential difference to chassis earth Max. 60 V continuously Max. 500 V during 1 minute

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 96 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Permitted supply voltage

I/O units 19 VDC - 35 VDC incl. ripple Panel unit 20.6 VDC - 30 VDC incl. ripple

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

97

Controller
Electrical connections

24V I/O supply

General

The 24V I/O is not galvanically separated from the rest of the controller voltages.

24 VDC supply for internal and external use

Voltage Ripple Permitted customer load Current limit

24.0 - 26.4V Max. 0.2V Max. 7A 13,5 ~0A.

24 VDC supply available at XT 31

24V I/O available for customer connections at XT 31 is shown in the figure in "Connections to screw terminals".

XT.31.2 XT.31.1 XT.31.4

24 V (through a 2 A fuse) for own fuses 0 V (connected to cabinet structure)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 98 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

115/230 VAC supply

General

This voltage is used in the robot for supplying optional service outlets. The AC supply is not galvanically separated from the rest of the controller voltages.

115/230 VAC supply for internal and external use

Voltage Permitted customer load Fuse size, 115 V Fuse size, 230 V

115 VAC or 230 VAC Max. 500 VA 6.3 A 3.15 A

115/230 VAC supply available at XT 21

115 VAC/230 VAC available for customer connections at XT 21 is shown in the figure in "Connection to screw terminals".

XT.21.1-5 XT.21.6-8 XT.21.9-13

230 VAC 115 VAC N (connected to cabinet structure)

C - 5: Buses Connection of the CAN bus

Illustration

The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the CAN bus:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

99

Controller
Electrical connections

C
A

D
X15 CAN1.1 (Internal I/O)

X6 CAN1.2 X7 CAN1.3

G D D

D E

X15, X6, X7

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

0V_CAN CAN_L drain CAN_H 24V_I/O

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

xx0100000241

A B

Base connector unit CAN bus

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 100 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

C D E F G

Control cabinet I/O Termination of last unit 120 ohm, 1%, 0.25 W metal film resistor See figure in section "CAN 2" below!

CAN 1.1

Used for internal I/O unit mounted inside the cabinet. No terminating resistor is fitted on CAN 1.1 regardless of whether any I/O units are used or not. CAN 1.1 is connected to socket X15 on the Base connector unit (see Connection of the CAN bus).

CAN 1.2

If CAN 1.2 is not used, a terminating resistor must be connected to the X6 socket (exceptional case see below!). If CAN 1.2 is used, the terminating resistor should be moved to the last I/O unit on the CAN 1.2 chain.
If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be mounted in CAN 1.3. This is in accordance with the basic rule, i.e. the CAN chain should be terminated in both end points.

CAN 1.3

If CAN 1.3 is unused, a terminating resistor must be connected to the X7 socket. If CAN 1.3 is used, the terminating resistor should be moved to the last I/O unit on the CAN 1.3 chain.
If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be mounted in CAN 1.3. This is in accordance with the basic rule, i.e. the CAN chain should be terminated in both end points.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

101

Controller
Electrical connections

Termination resistors in CAN bus

The CAN chain must be terminated with terminating resistors at each end! If CAN 1.2, for example, is not connected at the end of any CAN chain but somewhere between the end points of the chain, then no terminating resistor should be mounted in CAN 1.3.

CAN 2

The illustration below shows an example of how to connect the CAN 2 bus:
A B X8 CAN 2 D D D C

X8

1. 0V_CAN 2. CAN_L 3. drain 4. CAN_H 5. 24V_I/O

1. 0V_CAN 2. CAN_L 3. drain 4. CAN_H 5. 24V_I/O

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

xx0100000242

A B C D E F

Controller Base connector unit See figure in section "Illustration" above! I/O Termination of last unit 120 ohm, 1%, 0.25 W metal film resistor

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 102 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

The illustration below shows CAN connections on base connector unit:

A B C D

xx0100000243

A B C D

X6 CAN 1.2 (external I/O) X7 CAN 1.3 (external I/O) X8 CAN 2 (external I/O) X15 CAN 1.1 (internal I/O)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

103

Controller
Electrical connections

Interbus-S, slave DSQC 351

General

The unit can be operated as a slave for an Interbus-S system.

Supply

The Interbus-S slave must be fed externally to avoid shutting down the InterbusS net if a robot cell is switched off. The 24V power supply must be fed from outside the control cabinet and be connected to pin 2 on the Phoenix connector located on the Interbus-S cards front panel marked 24V.

Technical data

Also see the Interbus-S specification.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Unit ID

The unit ID to be entered in the Interbus-S master is 3. The length code depends on the selected data. Width between 1 and 4.

Layout, DSQC 351

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 351 board:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 104 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X20

X21

X5

X3

xx0100000225

X3 X5 X20 X21

Power connector DeviceNet connector Interbus-S, input Interbus-S, output

Communication concept

The Interbus-S system is able to communicate with a number of external devices, depending on the number of process words occupied by each unit. The robot may be equipped with one or two DSQC 351. The Interbus-S inputs and outputs are accessible in the robot as general inputs and outputs. For application data, refer to Interbus-S, International Standard, DIN 19258. An outline diagram of the communication concept is shown below:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

105

Controller
Electrical connections

E A
In

F C D
Out *1 In Out

B
Out *1 In

xx0100000224

A B C D E F *1

Master PLC Robot 1, word 1:3 Robot 1, word 4:7 Robot 2, word 8:11 128 inputs/128 outputs 64 inputs/64 outputs xx

Termination link

A link is connected between pins 5 and 9 in the plug on the interconnection cable connected to the OUT connector of each unit. The link informs the Interbus-S unit that more units are connected further out in the chain. (The last unit in the chain does not have a cable connected and therefore no link).

Connections, X5 DeviceNet connectors

See DeviceNet Connectors.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 106 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connector X20, Interbus-S IN

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X20, Interbus-S IN:

Signal name
TPDO1 TPDI1 GND NC NC TPDO1-N TPDI1-N NC NC

X20 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Function
Communication line TPDO1 Communication line TPDI1 Ground connection Not connected Not connected Communication line TPDO1-N Communication line TPDI1-N Not connected Not connected

Connections, connector X21, Interbus-S OUT

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X21, Interbus-S OUT:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

107

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
TPDO2 TPDI2 GND NC +5V TPDO2-N TPDI2-N NC RBST

X21 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Function
Communication line TPDO2 Communication line TPDI2 Ground connection Not connected + 5 VDC Communication line TPDO2-N Communication line TPDI2-N Not connected Synchronization

Connections, connector X3

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

5
xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal name
0 VDC NC GND NC + 24 VDC

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5

Function
External supply of Interbus-S Not connected Ground connection Not connected + 24 VDC

Bus status LEDs

The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC 352" above.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 108 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the board.

Designation
POWER-24 VDC NS/MS CAN Tx/CAN Rx POWER- 5 VDC RBDA

Color
Green Green/red Green/red Green Red

Description
Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and has a level above 12 VDC. See section "CAN bus status LED description". See section "CAN bus status LED description". Lit when both 5 VDC supplies are within limits, and no reset is active. Lit when this Interbus-S station is last in the Interbus-S network. If it is not (which is required), check parameter setup. Lit when Interbus-S is active. If there is no light, check network, nodes and connections. Lit when Interbus-S communication runs without errors.

BA

Green

RC

Green

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

109

Controller
Electrical connections

Profibus-DP, slave DSQC 352

General

The unit can be operated as a slave for a Profibus-DP system.

Supply

The Profibus does not need any external power supply. All the robot cells are connected to the trunk cable through a special D-sub connector which works as a very short drop cable. Because of this the profibus will work correctly even if a robot cell is turned off.

Technical data

Also see the Profibus-DP specification, International Standard DIN E 19245, part 3.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals. Also see the Circuit diagram.

Layout, DSQC 352

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 352 board:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 110 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X20

X5

X3

xx0100000223

X3 X5 X20

Power connector DeviceNet connector Profibus connection

Communication concept

The Profibus-DP system is able to communicate with a number of external devices, depending on the number of process words occupied by each unit. The robot may be equipped with one or two DSQC 352. The Profibus-DP inputs and outputs are accessible in the robot as general inputs and outputs. An outline diagram of the communication concept is shown below:

E A B C

F D

xx0100000222

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

111

Controller
Electrical connections

A B C D E F

Master PLC Robot 1, word 1:8 Robot 1, word 9:16 Robot 2, word 17:24 256 inputs/256 outputs 128 inputs/128 outputs

Termination

The Profibus cable must be terminated in both ends.

Connections, X5 DeviceNet connectors

See "Device Net Connectors".

Connections, connector X20, Profibus-DP

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X20, Interbus-S IN:

Signal name
Shield NC RxD/TxD-P Control-P GND +5 VDC

X20 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6

Function
Cable screen Not connected Receive/Transmit data P Ground

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 112 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
NC RxD/TxD-N NC

X20 pin
7 8 9

Function
Not connected Receive/Transmit data N Not connected

Connections, connector X3

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

5
xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal name
0 VDC NC GND NC + 24 VDC

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5

Function
External supply of Profibus-DP Not connected Ground connection Not connected External supply of Profibus-DP

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the board. The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC 352" above.

Designation
Profibus active

Color
Green

Description
Lit when the node is communicating with the master. If there is no light, check system messages in robot and in Profibus net.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

113

Controller
Electrical connections

Designation
NS/MS CAN Tx/CAN Rx

Color
Green/red Green/red

Description
See section "CAN bus status LED description". See section "CAN bus status LED description". Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and has a level above 12 VDC. If there is no light, check that voltage is present in the power unit and in the power connector. If not, check cables and connectors. If power is applied to the unit but it does not work, replace the unit.

POWER, 24 VDC Green

C - 6: I/O units Distributed I/O units

General

Up to 20 units can be connected to the same controller but only four of these can be installed inside the controller. Normally a distributed I/O unit is placed outside the controller.

Connection

The maximum total length of the distributed I/O cable is 100 m (from one end of the chain to the other end). The controller can be one of the end points or be placed somewhere in the middle of the chain.

Parameter setup

For setup parameters, see Users Guide, section System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 114 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Distributed I/O, digital sensors

General

Digital sensors are connected to one optional digital unit.

Technical data

See Product Specification for Controller S4Cplus.

Allowed types of digital sensors

The table below shows the allowed types of digital sensors to be used, and their signal levels respectively:

Sensor type Digital one bit sensor Digital two bit sensor

Signal level High, "1" Low, "0" High, "01" No signal, "00" Low, "10" Error status, "11" (stop program running)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

115

Controller
Electrical connections

Distributed I/O, digital I/O DSQC 328 (option)

General

The digital I/O unit handles digital communication between the robot system and any external systems.

Technical data
No. of inputs No. of outputs Supply voltage Supply source 16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from each other) 16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from each other) 24 VDC 24 V I/O or separate external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC 328

The figure below show the layout of the DSQC328 board:


A
OUT IN X1 1 10 X2 1 X4 1 10 10 MS NS OUT
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

IN

X3

10

12

1 X5

xx0100000240

Status LEDs

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 116 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connector X1

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide. The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Unit function
Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output

Signal name
Out ch 1 Out ch 2 Out ch 3 Out ch 4 Out ch 5 Out ch 6 Out ch 7 Out ch 8 0 V for outputs 1-8 24 V for outputs 1-8

X1 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connections, connector X2

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide. The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Unit function
Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output

Signal name
Out ch 9 Out ch 10 Out ch 11 Out ch 12 Out ch 13 Out ch 14 Out ch 15

X2 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

117

Controller
Electrical connections

Unit function
Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output

Signal name
Out ch 16 0 V for outputs 9-16 24 V for outputs 9-16

X2 pin
8 9 10

Connections, connector X3

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Unit function
Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input

Signal name
In ch 1 In ch 2 In ch 3 In ch 4 In ch 5 In ch 6 In ch 7 In ch 8 0 V for inputs 1-8 Not used

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the input. When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor (100 W) may be used.

Connections, connector X4

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Unit function
Optically isolated input Optically isolated input

Signal name
In ch 9 In ch 10

X4 pin
1 2

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 118 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Unit function
Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input

Signal name
In ch 11 In ch 12 In ch 13 In ch 14 In ch 15 In ch 16 0 V for inputs 9-16 Not used

X4 pin
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the input. When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor (100 W) may be used.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

119

Controller
Electrical connections

AD Combi I/O, DSQC 327 (optional)

General

The digital I/O unit handles digital and analog communication between the robot system and any external systems.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs No. of digital outputs No. of analog outputs Supply voltage Supply source, digital I/O 16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from each other) 16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from each other) 2 (galvanically isolated from the controller electronics) 24 VDC 24 V I/O or separate external supply

Supply source, analog I/O 24 V_CAN (with galvanically isolated DC/AC converter)

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see User s Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC 327

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC327 board:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 120 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

OUT IN

MS NS X2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

OUT IN

X1 1 10

X6 1 10 1 6

X3

X4 1 10

10

12

1 X5

xx0100000239

Status LEDs

Connector X5 is a CAN connector further described in section "Connection and address keying of the CAN bus".

Connections, connector X1

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide. The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Unit function
Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output

Signal name
Out ch 1 Out ch 2 Out ch 3 Out ch 4 Out ch 5 Out ch 6 Out ch 7 Out ch 8 0 V for outputs 1-8 24 V for outputs 1-8

X1 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

121

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connector X2

If supervision of the supply voltage is required, a bridge connection can be made to an optional digital input. The supervision instruction must be written in the RAPID program. This is described in the Users Guide. The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Unit function
Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output Optically isolated output

Signal name
Out ch 9 Out ch 10 Out ch 11 Out ch 12 Out ch 13 Out ch 14 Out ch 15 Out ch 16 0 V for outputs 9-16 24 V for outputs 9-16

X2 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connections, connector X3

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Unit function
Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input

Signal name
In ch 1 In ch 2 In ch 3 In ch 4 In ch 5 In ch 6 In ch 7 In ch 8 0 V for inputs 1-8 Not used

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 122 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connector X4

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Unit function
Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input Optically isolated input

Signal name
In ch 9 In ch 10 In ch 11 In ch 12 In ch 13 In ch 14 In ch 15 In ch 16 0 V for inputs 9-16 Not used

X4 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Connections, connectors X6

The table below shows the connections to connectors X6:

Signal name:
AN_ICH1 AN_ICH2 0V 0 VA AN_OCH1 AN_OCH2

X6 pin:
1 2 3 4 5 6

Explanation:
For test purposes only For test purposes only 0 V for In channels 1-2 0 V for Out channels 1-2 Out channels 1 Out channels 2

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the input. When connecting outputs, sensitive to pre-oscillation current, a series resistor (100 W) may be used.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

123

Controller
Electrical connections

Analog I/O, DSQC 355 (optional)

General

The analog I/O unit handles communication between the robot system and any external systems through analog sensors.

Technical data
No. of analog inputs No. of analog outputs No. of analog outputs Supply voltage 4 (-10 V/+10 V) 3 (-10 V/+10 V) 1 (4-20 mA)) 2 (galvanically isolated from the controller electronics) 24 VDC

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC 355

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 355 board:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 124 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X8

X7

Bus s tatus

X8 S2S3 X2 X5 X3

X7

DS QC 355

Analog I/O

AB B F lexible Automation

X5
xx0100000238

X3

X3 X5 X7 X8

Not used DeviceNet input and ID connector Analog outputs Analog inputs

Connections, connectors X7 analog output

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

13

12
xx0100000236

24

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

125

Controller
Electrical connections

The table below shows the connections to connector X7:

Signal name: X7 pin:


ANOUT_ ANOUT_ ANOUT_ ANOUT_ Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used GND GND GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Explanation:
Analog output 1, -10 V/+10 V Analog output 2, -10 V/+10 V Analog output 3, -10 V/+10 V Analog output 4, 4-20 mA

Analog output 1, 0 V Analog output 2, 0 V Analog output 3, 0 V Analog output 4, 0 V

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the input. Connect a resistor (100 W) in series when connecting outputs, sensitive to preoscillation current.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 126 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connectors X8 analog input

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

17

16
xx0100000237

32

The table below shows the connections to connector X8:

Signal name: X8 pin:


ANIN_1 ANIN_2 ANIN_3 ANIN_4 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used +24 V out 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Explanation:
Analog input 1, -10 V/+10 V Analog input 2, -10 V/+10 V Analog input 3, -10 V/+10 V Analog input 4, -10 V/+10 V

+24 VDC supply

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

127

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name: X8 pin:


+24 V out +24 V out +24 V out +24 V out +24 V out +24 V out +24 V out GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Explanation:
+24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply +24 VDC supply Analog input 1, 0 V Analog input 2, 0 V Analog input 3, 0 V Analog input 4, 0 V

The input current is 5.5 mA (at 24V) on the digital inputs. A capacitor connected to ground, to prevent disturbances, causes a short rush of current when setting the input. Connect a resistor (100 W) in series when connecting outputs, sensitive to preoscillation current.

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the board.

Designation
NS/MS RS232 Rx

Color
Green/ red Green

Description
See section 4.1. Indicates the state of the RS232 Rx line. LED is active when receiving data. If there is no light, check communication line and connections.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 128 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Designation
RS232 Tx

Color
Green

Description
Indicates the state of the RS232 Tx line. LED is active when transceiving data. If there is no light when transmission is expected, check error messages and check also system boards in rack. Indicates that supply voltage is present and at correct level. If there is no light, check that voltage is present on power unit and that power is present in power connector. If not, check cables and connectors. If power is applied to the unit but it does not work, replace the unit.

+5VDC / +12VDC / -12VDC Green

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

129

Controller
Electrical connections

Encoder interface unit, DSQC 354 (optional)

General

The encoder interface unit handles communication with an external conveyor:


One encoder input (synchronization of conveyor position with robot movements). The encoder is supplied with 24 V and 0 V, and sends position information on two channels. This information is computed by the on-board computer using quadrature decoding (QDEC) to determine position and direction. One digital input (external start signal/conveyor synchronization point)

Technical data
No. of encoder inputs No. of digital inputs Supply voltage Supply source 1 1 (24 VDC) 24 VDC 24 V I/O or external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

User reference Description Conveyor Tracking. For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 130 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Layout, DSQC 354

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 354 board:

X20

X5

X3

xx0100000233

X3 X5 X20

Not used DeviceNet input and ID connector Conveyor connection

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

131

Controller
Electrical connections

Encoder connections

The figure below shows the encoder connections:


AF AA AB 24 VDC 0V AC A B 24 VDC AD 0V

AE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Opto Opto

Opto

Opto Opto

Opto

AG

xx0100000234

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG

24 V I/O or external supply 0 V I/O or external supply Encoder Sync switch 10-16 not used Encoder unit Galvanic isolation

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 132 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections, connectors X20 encoder and digital input connections

The table below shows the connections to connector X20:

Signal name: X20 pin:


24 VDC 0V ENC ENC ENC_A ENC_B DIGIN DIGIN DIGIN Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Explanation:
24 VDC supply 0V Encoder 24 VDC Encoder 0 VDC Encoder phase A Encoder phase B Synchronization switch 24 VDC 0V Synchronization switch digital input

The figure below shows the layout of the pins in connector X20:

16
xx0100000235

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

133

Controller
Electrical connections

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the board.

Designation

Color

Description
Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and has a level above 12 VDC. If there is no light, check that voltage is present on power unit and in connector X20. If not, check cables and connectors. If power is applied to the unit but it does not work, replace the unit. See section "CAN bus status LED description". See section "CAN bus status LED description". Indicates phase 1 and 2 from encoder. Flashes at each Encoder pulse. At frequencies higher than a few Hz, flashing can no longer be observed (light will appear weaker). If there is no light, there is an error due to one or more of the following reasons: Faulty power supply for input circuit (internal or external). Defective input circuit on board. Short circuit or broken wire in external wiring or connectors. Internal error in unit.

POWER, 24 VDC Green

NS/MS ENC 1A/1B

Green/red Green

CAN Tx/CAN Rx Green/red

Constant light indicates constant high level on input and vice versa. No light on one LED indicates fault in one encoder phase.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 134 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Designation
DIGIN1

Color
Green

Description
Digital input. Lit when digital input is active. The input is used for external start signal/conveyor synchronization point. If there is no light, there is an error due to one or more of the following reasons: Faulty power supply for input circuit (internal or external). Faulty limit switch, photocell etc. Short circuit or broken wire in external wiring or connectors. Defective input circuit on board.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

135

Controller
Electrical connections

Relay I/O, DSQC 332 (optional)

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and any external systems through relay outputs and digital inputs.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs No. of relay outputs Supply voltage Supply source 16 (divided into two groups of 8, galvanically isolated from each other) 16 (a single normally open contact, isolated from each other) 24 VDC 24 V I/O or separate external supply

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC 332

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 332 board:
A
OUT IN X1 1 X3 1 16 1 16 16 1 16 X4 MS NS OUT
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

IN X2

12

1 X5

xx0100000232

Status LEDs

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 136 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5

See below for connection tables! See below for connection tables! See below for connection tables! See below for connection tables! CAN connection detailed in section "Connection of CAN bus"!

Connections, connector X1

The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Signal name
Out ch 1a Out ch 1b Out ch 2a Out ch 2b Out ch 3a Out ch 3b Out ch 4a Out ch 4b Out ch 5a Out ch 5b Out ch 6a Out ch 6b Out ch 7a Out ch 7b Out ch 8a Out ch 8b

X1 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
Contact, relay 1 Contact, relay 1 Contact, relay 2 Contact, relay 2 Contact, relay 3 Contact, relay 3 Contact, relay 4 Contact, relay 4 Contact, relay 5 Contact, relay 5 Contact, relay 6 Contact, relay 6 Contact, relay 7 Contact, relay 7 Contact, relay 8 Contact, relay 8

Connections, connector X2

The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Signal name
Out ch 9a

X2 pin
1

Function
Contact, relay 9

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

137

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
Out ch 9b Out ch 10a Out ch 10b Out ch 11a Out ch 11b Out ch 12a Out ch 12b Out ch 13a Out ch 13b Out ch 14a Out ch 14b Out ch 15a Out ch 15b Out ch 16a Out ch 16b

X2 pin
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
Contact, relay 9 Contact, relay 10 Contact, relay 10 Contact, relay 11 Contact, relay 11 Contact, relay 12 Contact, relay 12 Contact, relay 13 Contact, relay 13 Contact, relay 14 Contact, relay 14 Contact, relay 15 Contact, relay 15 Contact, relay 16 Contact, relay 16

Connections, connector X3

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal name
In ch 1 In ch 2 In ch 3 In ch 4 In ch 5 In ch 6 In ch 7 In ch 8 0 v for In ch 1-8 Not used Not used

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 138 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

X3 pin
12 13 14 15 16

Connections, connector X4

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Signal name
In ch 9 In ch 10 In ch 11 In ch 12 In ch 13 In ch 14 In ch 15 In ch 16 0 v for In ch 9-16 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

X4 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

139

Controller
Electrical connections

Digital I/O (120 VAC), DSQC 320 (optional)

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and any external systems through galvanically isolated outputs and inputs.

Technical data
No. of inputs No. of outputs Supply voltage 16 (galvanically isolated from each other) 16 (galvanically isolated from each other) 120 VAC

Also see Product Specification for controller S4Cplus.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: Controller. Also see the Circuit Diagram.

Layout, DSQC 320

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 320 board:
A
OUT IN X1 1 X3 1 16 1 16 16 1 16 X4 MS NS OUT
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

IN X2

12

1 X5

xx0100000231

A X1 X2

Status LEDs See below for connection tables! See below for connection tables!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 140 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X3 X4 X5

See below for connection tables! See below for connection tables! CAN connection detailed in section "Connection of CAN bus"!

Connections, connector X1

The table below shows the connections to connector X1:

Signal name X1 pin


Out ch 1a Out ch 1b Out ch 2a Out ch 2b Out ch 3a Out ch 3b Out ch 4a Out ch 4b Out ch 5a Out ch 5b Out ch 6a Out ch 6b Out ch 7a Out ch 7b Out ch 8a Out ch 8b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
AC voltage to switch 1/AC output signal from switch 1 AC voltage to switch 1/AC output signal from switch 1 AC voltage to switch 2/AC output signal from switch 2 AC voltage to switch 2/AC output signal from switch 2 AC voltage to switch 3/AC output signal from switch 3 AC voltage to switch 3/AC output signal from switch 3 AC voltage to switch 4/AC output signal from switch 4 AC voltage to switch 4/AC output signal from switch 4 AC voltage to switch 5/AC output signal from switch 5 AC voltage to switch 5/AC output signal from switch 5 AC voltage to switch 6/AC output signal from switch 6 AC voltage to switch 6/AC output signal from switch 6 AC voltage to switch 7/AC output signal from switch 7 AC voltage to switch 7/AC output signal from switch 7 AC voltage to switch 8/AC output signal from switch 8 AC voltage to switch 8/AC output signal from switch 8

Connections, connector X2

The table below shows the connections to connector X2:

Signal name
Out ch 9a Out ch 9b

X2 pin
1 2

Function
AC voltage to switch 9/AC output signal from switch 9 AC voltage to switch 9/AC output signal from switch 9

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

141

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
Out ch 10a Out ch 10b Out ch 11a Out ch 11b Out ch 12a Out ch 12b Out ch 13a Out ch 13b Out ch 14a Out ch 14b Out ch 15a Out ch 15b Out ch 16a Out ch 16b

X2 pin
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
AC voltage to switch 10/AC output signal from switch 10 AC voltage to switch 10/AC output signal from switch 10 AC voltage to switch 11/AC output signal from switch 11 AC voltage to switch 11/AC output signal from switch 11 AC voltage to switch 12/AC output signal from switch 12 AC voltage to switch 12/AC output signal from switch 12 AC voltage to switch 13/AC output signal from switch 13 AC voltage to switch 13/AC output signal from switch 13 AC voltage to switch 14/AC output signal from switch 14 AC voltage to switch 14/AC output signal from switch 14 AC voltage to switch 15/AC output signal from switch 15 AC voltage to switch 15/AC output signal from switch 15 AC voltage to switch 16/AC output signal from switch 16 AC voltage to switch 16/AC output signal from switch 16

Connections, connector X3

The table below shows the connections to connector X3:

Signal name
In ch 1a In ch 1b In ch 2a In ch 2b In ch 3a In ch 3b In ch 4a In ch 4b In ch 5a In ch 5b

X3 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Function
AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1 AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1 AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2 AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2 AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3 AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3 AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4 AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4 AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5 AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 142 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal name
In ch 6a In ch 6b In ch 7a In ch 7b In ch 8a In ch 8b

X3 pin
11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6 AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6 AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7 AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7 AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8 AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

Connections, connector X4

The table below shows the connections to connector X4:

Signal name
In ch 9a In ch 9b In ch 10a In ch 10b In ch 11a In ch 11b In ch 12a In ch 12b In ch 13a In ch 13b In ch 14a In ch 14b In ch 15a In ch 15b In ch 16a In ch 16b

X4 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Function
AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1 AC input signal from switch 1/Neutral voltage to switch 1 AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2 AC input signal from switch 2/Neutral voltage to switch 2 AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3 AC input signal from switch 3/Neutral voltage to switch 3 AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4 AC input signal from switch 4/Neutral voltage to switch 4 AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5 AC input signal from switch 5/Neutral voltage to switch 5 AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6 AC input signal from switch 6/Neutral voltage to switch 6 AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7 AC input signal from switch 7/Neutral voltage to switch 7 AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8 AC input signal from switch 8/Neutral voltage to switch 8

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

143

Controller
Electrical connections

C - 7: Communication Communication concept, Allen-Bradley

General

The robot may communicate with the Allen Bradley system only, or be used in combination with the I/O system in the robot. For example, the inputs to the robot may come from the Allen Bradley system while the outputs from the robot control external equipment go via general I/O addresses and the Allen Bradley system only reads the outputs as status signals.

Definitions

The Allen Bradley system can communicate with up to 64 external systems. Each of these systems is called a Rack and is given a Rack Address 0-63. Basically, each robot connected to the Allen Bradley system will occupy one rack. Each rack is divided into four sections called Quarters. Each quarter provides 32 inputs and 32 outputs and a rack will subsequently provide 128 inputs and 128 outputs. A rack may also be shared by 2, 3, or 4 robots. Each of these robots will then have the same rack address, but different starting quarters must be specified.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 144 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Illustration

The illustration below shows a block diagram of the Allen-Bradley system, where Robot 1 uses a full rack while robot 2 and robot 3 share one rack. The rack address, starting quarter, and other required parameters such as baud rate, LED status etc. are entered in the configuration parameters.
Allen Bradley control system

Robot 1 - 128 in / 128 out Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Rack ID 12 (example) Rack size 4 Starting quarter 1 128 in / 128 out

Robot 2 - 64 in / 64 out Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Rack ID 13 (example) Rack size 2 Starting quarter 1 Robot 3 - 64 in / 64 out Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Rack ID 13 (example) Rack size 2 Starting quarter 3 64 in / 64 out 64 in / 64 out

Other systems Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4

en0100000255

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

145

Controller
Electrical connections

RIO, remote I/O for Allen-Bradley PLC DSQC 350

General

The unit handles communication between the robot system and the Allen Bradley system.

Technical data
No. of digital inputs No. of digital outputs Unit is programmable for 32, 64, 96 or 128 digital inputs Unit is programmable for 32, 64, 96 or 128 digital outputs

Also see the Allen-Bradley RIO specification.

Further information

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals. Also see Circuit Diagram.

Connection

The RIO-unit should be connected to an Allen-Bradley PLC using a screened, two conductor cable.

Layout, DSQC 350

The figure below shows the layout of the DSQC 350 board:

X5 X9

X3

X8 DS QC 350
AB B F lexible Automation

xx0100000226

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 146 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

X3 X5 X8 X9

Not used DeviceNet and ID connector RIO in RION out

Connections, connector X8

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

5
xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X8:

Signal name
LINE1 (blue) LINE2 (clear) Shield Cabinet ground

X8 pin
1 2 3 4

Function
Remote I/O in Remote I/O in Remote I/O in Remote I/O in

Connections, connector X9

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:

5
xx0100000221

The table below shows the connections to connector X9:

Signal name
Blue Clear Shield Cabinet ground

X9 pin
1 2 3 4

Function
Remote I/O out Remote I/O out Remote I/O out Remote I/O out

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

147

Controller
Electrical connections

Termination

When the robot is last in a RIO loop, the loop must be terminated with a termination resistor according to Allen-Bradleys specification.

Warranty

This product incorporates a communications link which is licensed under patents and proprietary technology of the Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. The Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. does not warrant or support this product. All warranty and support services for this product are the responsibility of and provided by ABB Flexible Automation.

Bus status LEDs

The figure and table below show the location and significance of the LEDs on the board. The designations refer to LEDs shown in the figure in section "Layout, DSQC 350" above.

Designation

Color

Description
Indicates that a supply voltage is present, and has a level above 12 VDC. If there is no light, check that voltage is present on power unit and in power connector. If not, check cables and connectors. If power is applied to the unit but it does not work, replace the unit. See section "CAN bus status LED description". Steady green indicates RIO link in operation. If there is no light, check network, cables and connections. Also check that PLC is operational. Flashing green indicates that communication is established, but the INIT_COMPLETE bit is not set in NA chip, or configuration, rack size etc. does not match configuration set in PLC. If LED keeps flashing continuously, check setup

POWER-24 VDC Green

NS/MS CAN Tx/CAN Rx NAC STATUS

Green/red See section "CAN bus status LED description". Yellow Green

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 148 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Communication, serial links

General

The robot has three serial channels, which can be used by the customer to communicate with printers, terminals, computers, and other equipment (see the figure in "Connections" below).
COM1 (computer system) - RS 232 115 kbps. This was formerly referred to as Com2. COM2 - RS 232 with RTS-CTS-control and support for XON/XOFF, transmission speed 300 - 38 400 bps. This was formerly referred to as SIO1. COM3 - RS 422 full duplex TXD4, TXD4-N, RXD4, RXD4-N, transmission speed 300 - 38 400 bps. This was formerly referred to as SIO2. For temporary use: MC/CONSOLE - RS 232 115 kbps. This was formerly referred to as Com1.

Further information

For setup parameters, see User's Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals. Circuit Diagram. Location in the cabinet (see figure in section "Connection to screw terminals").

Technical data

See Product Specification for controller S4Cplus. Separate documentation is included when the option RAP Serial link is ordered.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

149

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections

The figure below shows the connection of serial channels:

xx0100000219

External computer

Customer terminals, on base connector board: X10 (COM2) and X9 (COM3), see section "Connection to screw terminals".

Connections on DSQC 504, COM1

Standard RS232 port. The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:
5

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the signals from the COM1 (RS232):

Signal
DCD RX TX

Pin
1 2 3

Description
Data carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 150 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal
DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI NC

Pin
4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Description
Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send Ring Indicator Not Connected

Connections on DSQC 504, D-sub connector X10, COM2

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:


5

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X10:

COM2 Signal name


RxD (Receive Data) TxD (Transmit Data) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 0V DSR (Data Ready Set) RTS N (Request To Send N) CTS (Clear To Send)

X10 pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

151

Controller
Electrical connections

Connections on DSQC 504, D-sub connector X9, COM3

The figure below shows the pin configuration of the connector:


5

6 9

xx0100000220

The table below shows the connections to connector X9:

COM3 Signal name


TxD (Transmit Data) TxD N (Transmit Data N) RxD (Receive Data) RxD N (Receive data N) 0V DATA (Data Signals in Half Duplex Mode) DATA N (Data Signals in Half Duplex Mode N) DCLK (Data Transmission Clock) DCLK N (Data Transmission Clock N)

X9 socket
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Connections to MC/CONSOLE

The figure below shows the MC/CONSOLE connection behind the service hatch:

xx0100000218

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 152 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

External computer

Standard RS232 port intended for temporary use, e.g. connection of laptop/PC. The table below shows the signals on the MC/CONSOLE (RS232):

Signal
RX TX GND

Pin
2 3 5

Description
Receive Data Transmit Data Signal Ground

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

153

Controller
Electrical connections

Communication, Ethernet

General

The robot has two Ethernet channels available:


LAN (connected to the Main computer) Service (connected to the I/O computer)

Connection of LAN (Main computer)

The figure below shows an outline diagram of the Ethernet TCP/IP:

E thernet hub
xx0100000217

A B C

External computer Controller Robot 1 Controller Robot 2

Used for connection of shielded twisted-pair Ethernet (TPE), or as defined in IEEE 802.3: 10/100 BASE-T. Maximum node-to-node distance 100 meter. The main computer board has no termination for a cable shield. The cable shield must be grounded at the cabinet wall with a cable gland. 10BASE-T is a point-to-point net, connected via a HUB, see the figure above.

Signal
TX+

X1 Pin
1

Description
Transmit data line +

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 154 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

Signal
TXRX+ NC NC RXNC NC

X1 Pin
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Description
Transmit data line Receive data line + Not Connected Not Connected Receive data line Not Connected Not Connected

The figure below shows the main computer board front:


1

X1
LAN

PWR

HDD

STATUS

X2
xx0100000216

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

155

Controller
Electrical connections

Connection of Service (I/O Computer)

Used for connection of a laptop to the service outlet on the front of the controller cabinet (behind service hatch). The figure below shows how to connect a laptop to the service outlet:

E thernet

xx0100000215

For setup parameters, see Users Guide - System Parameters, Topic: I/O Signals. Also see the Circuit Diagram. Separate documentation is included when the option Ethernet services is ordered.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 156 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Electrical connections

External operators panel

General

All necessary components are supplied, except for the external enclosure.

Dimensions for installation

Install the assembled panel in a housing which satisfies protection class, IP 54, in accordance with IEC 144 and IEC 529! The figure below shows the main dimensions of the external operators panel:
B M8 (x4) 62 A M4 (x4)

C 45 70 140 184 200

E 90 5 (x2) F G

155

xx0100000214

A B

Holes for operators panel Holes for flange

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

157

Controller
Electrical connections

C D E F G

Required depth: 200 mm External panel enclosure (option) Holes for teach pendant unit (TPU) holder Teach pendant unit (TPU) connector Connection to the controller

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 158 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Start-up

Section D: Start-up Inspection before start-up

General

Perform the following checks before starting up the robot system:

Check that:

1. the controller mains section is protected with fuses. 2. the electrical connections are correct and correspond to the identification plate on the controller. 3. the teach pendant and peripheral equipment are properly connected. 4. any limiting devices that establish the restricted space (when utilized) are installed. 5. the physical environment is as specified. 6. the operating mode selector on the operators panel is in the Manual mode position. 7. when external safety devices are used, check that these have been connected or that the following circuits in either XS3 (connector on the outside left cabinet wall) or X1-X4 (screw terminals on the panel unit) are strapped:

Device External limit switches External emergency stop External emergency stop internal 24 V General stop + General stop Auto stop + Auto stop Motor off clamping

XS3 A5-A6, B5-B6 A3-A4, B3-B4 A1-A2, B1-B2 A11-A12, B11-B12 A13-A14, B13-B14 A7-A8, B7-B8 A9-A10, B9-10 A15-A16, B15-16

Panel unit X1.3-4, X2.3-4 X1.9-10, X2.9-10 X1.7-8, X2.7-8 X3.10-12, X4.10-12 X3.7-8, X4.7-8 X3.11-12, X4.11-12 X3.7-9, X4.7-9 X1.5-6, X2.5-6

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

159

Controller
Start-up

Start-up

General

1. Switch on the mains switch on the cabinet. 1. The robot performs its self-test on both the hardware and software, which takes approximately 1 minute. 2. If the robot is not supplied with the software already installed, install the software as described in chapter "Robot Controller".
A welcome message is shown on the Teach Pendant Unit display.

3. To switch from MOTORS OFF to MOTORS ON, press the enabling device on the teach pendant. 4. Update the revolution counters as described in the Calibration chapter, section "Updating the revolution counters". 5. IRB 940: Check the position of the spiral cable in the centre tube sleeve. Correct position is described in the Calibration chapter, section "Correct orientation of axes". 6. Check the calibration position as described in the Calibration chapter, section "Checking the calibration position". 7. When the controller, with the manipulator electrically connected, is powered up for the first time, ensure that the power supply is connected for at least 36 hours continuously, in order to fully charge the batteries for the serial measurement board. It takes approx. 4 hours to fully charge a computer system battery. 8. After having checked the above, verify that:
the start, stop and mode selection (including the key lock switches) control devices work as intended. each axis moves and is restricted (if possible) as intended. emergency stop and safety stop (where included) circuits and devices are functional. it is possible to disconnect and isolate the external power sources. the teach and playback facilities work correctly. the safeguarding is in place.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 160 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Start-up

at reduced speed, the robot operates properly and has the capability to handle the product or workpiece. in automatic (normal) operation, the robot operates properly and has the capability to perform the intended task at the rated speed and load.

9. The robot is now ready for operation.

Operating the robot

Starting and operating the robot is described in the Users Guide. Before start-up, make sure that the robot cannot collide with any other objects in the working space.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

161

Controller
Installation of controller software

Section E: Installation of controller software Loading system software

General

The robot system may be delivered with or without system software. When the system is not delivered with software, this must be downloaded in one of a number of ways.

Software installed on delivery

If the robot controller is ordered with the software installed on delivery, the controller software and settings are already stored in the storage memory and the system is ready to use.

Software not installed on delivery

If the robot controller is ordered and delivered without software or if you want to reconfigure your system, the RobInstall tool must be used to install the controller software. The RobInstall tool is included on the RobotWare CD-ROM (see section "RobotWare CD-ROM"). The RobInstall tool can be used both for creation of the controller software and for downloading it to the controller system.

Types of software loading

A B C E
xx0100000192

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 162 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

A B C D E

RobotWare CD-ROM to install RobInstall and System Pack on PC Floppy Disks IOC Ethernet (service) with delivered boot cable UTP-X Connected to IOC MC Ethernet (LAN) network in workshop

When downloading, the controller software can be transferred to the controller storage memory in three ways as shown in the figure above.
using floppy disks, using Ethernet connected direct to the IO computer (IOC) service outlet on the front of the controller cubicle, using Ethernet connected via a local area network (LAN) to the main computer (MC).

Boot Image

The transfer and installation of the controller software to the controller storage memory via Ethernet or floppy disks is executed by a basic program named Boot Image. This basic program must always be in the storage memory. When starting the controller, with no controller software installed, Boot Image will start and ask the operator for controller software installation instructions. If the controller software is already installed and a warm start is performed, Boot Image is not used. The installed controller software can be deleted by a cold start and then the Boot Image will be reactivated.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

163

Controller
Installation of controller software

RobotWare CD-ROM
The CD contains all the System software and should therefore be treated and stored carefully.

RobotWare CDROM contents

The RobotWare CD-ROM contains the following:

Contents
1. RobInstall

Description
A PC tool used to create and install the controller operating system in the robot control system. On-line documentation for the RobInstall application and the Controller Operating System Package. Controller Operating System Package for S4Cplus. This package includes all the software needed to create the controller operating system with any ordered options. Please note that it is possible to install different releases with different versions of the same system package (see section "Media Pool in the PC"). A tool (created in LabView) for viewing MotionTest Signals (oscilloscope function) and also for logging these signals. On the CD is also included a so called FTP client named Voyager. Please note that this is not an ABB product but a shareware program, which means that it can be installed and used for a limited time, but that it has to be registered for permanent use. Registering means that a certain fee must be paid to the vendor. The FTP client is used to transport files manually between the PC and the robot controller storage memory. These actions are carried out in the same way as in a file manager or in Windows Explorer.

2.

Documentation

3.

Controller OS Package

4.

Test Signal Viewer

5.

FTP Client

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 164 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Installation of the RobotWare on the PC (except FTP Client)

This section describes how to install the software delivered on the RobotWare CD-ROM onto a PC hard drive, to be transferred to the robot system. 1. Insert the CD in your reader. 1. The Install Shield will automatically start and guide you through the install process (if it does not start, double-click the CD icon on your PC). When the setup type window is displayed, it is recommended to select the Custom button. Then Next button will open the Select Components window, where normally all the four options, RobInstall, Documentation, Controller OS Package and Test Signal Viewer should be marked as selected.

Installation of the FTP Client on the PC

This section describes how to install the FTP Client onto a PC hard drive. 1. In the Explorer, select and open the directory "ftp" on the CD. 2. Double-click the file ftpvsetup.exe.
The Install Shield for the FTP client will start and guide you through the installation. Please read the "Readme" file for information about license regulations.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

165

Controller
Installation of controller software

Installing new Robot Controller Software with RobInstall

General

Since most systems have the operating system installed already on delivery, the RobotWare CD-ROM is normally not needed. However it should be used when:
creating a new controller operating system, changing the current operating system configuration, e.g. concerning included options.

Nomenclature

In the text dealing with RobInstall, the following nomenclature is used:

Concept:
System pack

Means:
This is the RobotWare Controller Operating System Package for S4Cplus, including all options, even if they are not ordered and activated. This is a text string, or a special file with the text string, which is used to define and open both the BaseWare and all ordered RobotWare options. This is a complete controller software, i.e. controller operating system, based on the system pack and the key. It can also include any user files to be added to the home directory on the controller storage memory.

Key

System

How to use RobInstall

Robinstall is used to create and install the controller software in the S4Cplus robot controller. With RobInstall, you can:
create a new system, update an existing system, download a system to the controller using the Ethernet connection, create Boot Disks to transfer the system to the Controller.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 166 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
1.

Action
Make sure RobInstall is installed. If not, install it according to the instructions in section "Installation of the RobotWare on the PC". Click the start button on your PC and select programs/ABB Robotics/RobInstall/RobInstall. The RobInstall start window will open.

Illustration/Info

2.

3.

xx0100000185

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

167

Controller
Installation of controller software

Create a new Robot Controller System

Setting up the system Step


1.

Action
Start RobInstall as described in section "How to use Robinstall". Choose New to create a new Robot Controller system as shown in the figure.

Illustration/Info

2.

xx0100000179

3.

Enter a name for the new controller system. Select a saving location or use the default directory, normally "Program Files\ABB Robotics\system" (see the figure below, position 1).

xx0100000180

4.

Enter the RobotWare key or add from file. If added from a file, files with the extension .kxt should be used (see the figure above, position 2).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 168 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
5.

Action
Press OK. The configured system will be displayed in the next window (see the figure below).

Illustration/Info

xx0100000181

6.

If no external options or parameters are to be added or changed, press Finish to create the new controller system. Otherwise press Next to continue to "Additional Keys" (see section "Add or remove external options").

Add or remove external options Step


1.

Action
To add or remove external options, press Next in the screen shown in the last figure in section "Setting up the system" or click on "Additional Keys" in the menu to the left.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000182

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

169

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
2.

Action
Enter the key string for the selected option and press Add Key to list, or pressAdd key from file to select a key string file. To remove additional keys, select the key in the Included Additional Keys list and press Remove Key. Press Finish to create the controller system or press Next to continue to "Parameter Data" (see section "Add or remove additional system parameters).

Illustration/Info

3.

4.

Add or remove additional system parameters

Step
1.

Action
To add or remove additional parameters, press Next in the screen shown in the last figure in section "Add or remove external options" or click on "Parameter Data" in the menu to the left.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000183

2.

Press Add to load manipulator calibration data (see the figure above, position 1). This is the calib.cfg file delivered on the Manipulator Parameter disk (see section "The manipulator parameter disk").

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 170 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

Action
To remove manipulator calibration data, press Remove. Press Add to load additional system parameters, see pos. 2. All system parameter files added here will be automatically loaded together with the system, when the controller is restarted with the new system. To remove additional parameters, select the parameter in the "Loaded Additional Parameters" list and press Remove. Press Finish to create the controller system or press Next to continue to "Options" (see section "Change options or system pack revision").

Illustration/Info

4.

5.

6.

Change options or system pack revision

Step
1.

Action
To change the option configuration, press Next in the screen shown in the figure below or click on "Options" in the menu to the left.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000184

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

171

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
2.

Action
To change the Teach Pendant Unit language, robot type, or software options, press Options (see the figure above, position 1). Normally the latest release or revision of all system packages and option packages stored in the media pool (see section "Media Pool in the PC") will be used. If an earlier revision should be used, uncheck the check mark and press Rev. Select (see the figure above, position 2). In the new window select the system package to use and press OK. If you want the system to start up in query mode, put a mark in the query mode selection square. For further details of the query mode, see section "Start in Query Mode". Press Finish to create the controller system or press Next to view the current configuration.

Illustration/Info

3.

4.

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 172 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Update the Robot Controller image

Actions Step
1.

Action
To update an existing controller system, press Update, see the figure below.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000189

2.

Select a system in the system list and press OK, see the figure above. Please note that a pop up menu can be shown by clicking right mouse button. With this menu Copy, Rename or Delete can be selected for the marked system.

xx0100000190

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

173

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

Action
The window displaying the current configuration of the system will be shown. Follow the instructions in sections "Add or remove external options", "Add or remove additional system parameters" or "Change options or system pack revision" to modify the system.

Illustration/Info

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 174 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Transfer Robot Controller System using Ethernet connection

Selecting type of set-up

Before a system can be downloaded to a robot controller using the RobInstall tool some preparations and set up must be done. This may be done in one of two ways:

If you are using:

...then see instructions in section:

...and continue in section:

a direct connection between "If using a direct connection "Download Robot PC and IOC service outlet between PC and IOC service Controller System" on controller outlet on controller" below! below! Network Intranet connection "If using Network Intranet with fixed IP addresses connection with fixed IP addresses " below! Network Intranet connection "If using Network Intranet with DHCP (Dynamic Host connection with DHCP " Configuration Protocol) below! "Download Robot Controller System" below! "Download Robot Controller System" below!

If using a direct connection between PC and IOC service outlet on controller

Step
1.

Action
Connect a patch-cable between the Ethernet connection on the front of the controller and the corresponding connection on the PC/Laptop. Make sure that the Network protocol is set for TCP/IP properties.

Illustration/Info

2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

175

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

Action
Change the TCP/IP Properties in accordance with the following table and figure:

Illustration/Info

xx0100000178

If using Network Intranet connection with fixed IP addresses

Step
1. 2.

Action
Make sure that the Network protocol is set for TCP/ IP properties. Change the TCP/IP Properties in accordance with the values to be used for IP address, Subnet mask and Gateway. Perform a X-START (see section "x-START") or CSTART (see section "C-start") on the S4Cplus controller. Configure the IP address to be used for the robot controller from the TPU.

Illustration/Info

3.

4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 176 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

If using Network Intranet connection with DHCP

Step
1.

Action
Read Ethernet MAC-id on the Teach Pendant Unit (see section "LAN settings").

Illustration/Info

Download Robot Controller System


Before downloading, check the following: Make sure there is at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass storage memory. For information on how to perform a manual storage capacity check, see section "Check Storage Capacity". Make sure that the robot controller displays the Start Window on the Teach Pendant Unit (see section "Start window").

Step
1.

Action
To download a controller system, press Download as in the figure below:

Illustration/Info

xx0100000176

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

177

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
2.

Action

Illustration/Info

Select a target system as in If a direct connection is used with the patch the figure, position 1. cable between the PC and the controller front, then just select the default IP address (192.168.125.1) and "Direct" option. In other cases, write the correct IP address for the robot controller and select "Hostname or IP-address". RobInstall will store already used IP addresses, which can later be selected with the down arrow. Type your username and password if required by the robot controller as in the figure below, position 2.

3.

xx0100000177

4.

Test the connection by pressing Test Connection and press OK if a connection is established. Select a system in the list on the left and press OK as in the figure below. Please note that it is possible to select another system pool than the shown one (in such case be sure to select the system pool directory, not the system itself on the lower level).

5.

xx0100000175

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 178 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
6.

Action

Illustration/Info

RobInstall will now create a After downloading it is possible to restart system file and download it the controller with the new downloaded to the controller. controller system. Otherwise, the controller may be restarted from the Teach Pendant Unit as detailed in section "Reboot".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

179

Controller
Installation of controller software

Transfer Robot Controller System using floppy disks


Before downloading, make sure: there is at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass storage memory. For information on how to perform a manual storage capacity check, see section "Check Storage Capacity". that the robot controller displays the Start Window on the Teach Pendant Unit (see section "Start Window"). an optional floppy disk drive is installed in the robot controller.

Create Boot Diskettes from RobInstall

Step
1.

Action
Press Create Boot Disk as in the figure below.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000173

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 180 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
2.

Action
Select a system in the list on the left and press OK as in the figure below. RobInstall will now create an image file and estimate the number of disks needed.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000175

xx0100000188

3. 4.

Insert a formatted 1.44 Mb diskette into the disk drive. Press Continue to start copy the Robot Controller System image to the disks. Use the finished floppy disks to boot your system as described in section "Boot Disks".

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

181

Controller
Installation of controller software

RobInstall preferences

Customizing RobInstall

RobInstall may be customized to suit particular requirements.

Step
1.

Action
To customize RobInstall for new programs and optional products, press Preferences as shown in the figure. See also chapter "System Directory Structure".

Illustration/Info

xx0100000186

2.

To select another media pool (see section "Media Pool in the PC"), press Select Media Pool as shown in the figure, position 1.

xx0100000187

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 182 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Installation of controller software

Step
3.

Action
To add a new system package or option package to the media pool, press Import Program as shown in the figure, position 2. Also see chapter "System Directory Structure".

Illustration/Info

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

183

Controller
Robot controller

Section F: Robot controller BootImage

General

The BootImage is a basic program which is used to start up the system from "scratch".

Purpose of the program

This program is already installed in the controller at delivery and is used to:
restart the system load the system from boot disks or network connections set or check network settings choose a system from the mass storage memory.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 184 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Start window

When is it shown?

xx0100000168

The start window displays the start menu and will appear in the following cases:
When no controller operating system is installed at power on. After X-START (see the part "How to perform a Restart"). After C-START (see the part "How to perform a Restart").

Possible actions

From this window you can choose to do one of the following:

Restart the system, Reboot

The BootImage will be re-executed, used to apply changes in the system settings (see the part "Reboot Window").

Load a system from diskettes, Boot Disks

(See the part "Boot Disk Window".)

Set the network settings, Network Settings

Set network settings for the Main Computer or check how to configure your PC (see the part "Network Settings Window").

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

185

Controller
Robot controller

Choose a system from the mass storage memory, Select System

If there is one or more systems in the mass storage memory, you can choose to activate one of them (see the part "System selection window").

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 186 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Reboot Window

When is it shown?

The Reboot window will be displayed if any of the system settings are changed or when Reboot is pressed in the Start window as shown in the figure below:.

xx0100000169

Button YES NO

Function Restarts the system Returns to the start window

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

187

Controller
Robot controller

Boot Disk Window

When is it shown?

The Boot Disk window will be displayed when Boot Disks is pressed in the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start window".

How to create boot disks

Information on how to create boot disks from RobInstall can be found in section "Create Boot Diskettes from Robinstall".

Load the system Step


1.

Action
Insert the correct diskette in the floppy disk drive and press OK. If the diskette is alright, the system will be loaded. CANCEL removes all previously loaded data and returns to the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start window".

Illustration/Info

xx0100000170

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 188 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Network Settings Window

When is it shown?

The Network Settings window will be displayed when Network Settings is pressed in the Start window as shown below.

xx0200000209

LAN Settings Service Settings CANCEL

Press to configure the Main Computer for communication with a PC on a Local Area Network (LAN). Also see "LAN settings"! Press to view the required settings for the PC to communicate with the I/O Computer. Also see "Service settings"! Press to return to the Start window as shown in figure "Start window".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

189

Controller
Robot controller

LAN Settings Window

When is it shown?

The LAN Settings window will be displayed when LAN Settings is pressed in the Network Settings window as shown in the figure in section "Network Settings".

en0100000256.gif

NONE CANCEL

will, after the system is rebooted, remove the IP settings. returns to the Start window, as shown in the figure in section "Start Window", without changing any settings.

Node identification Parameter


MAC ID Current IP

Type
Node identification Node identification

Description
The Main Computers ethernet address. The Main Computers current IP address. This row is blank if the LAN Settings have not been defined. Space for typing in a new IP address, for the Main Computer or the DHCP server. See Configure for fixed IP network and Configure for DHCP distributed IP network below.

IP

Network setting

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 190 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Parameter

Type

Description
Shows the subnet mask of the network. Only visible when configured for fixed IP. Shows the gateway IP for the network. Only visible when configured for fixed IP.

(Subnet mask) Network setting (Gateway) Network setting

Configure for fixed IP network

1. Press FIX IP. 2. Fill in the assigned IP address for the Main Computer, and the Subnet Mask and Gateway for the Network and press OK.
You will be asked to reboot the system.

3. Press YES to make the new setting take effect.

Configure for DHCP distributed IP network

1. Press DHCP. 1. The value for IP will change to DHCP. 2. Press OK.
You will be asked to reboot the system.

3. Press YES to make the new setting take effect.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

191

Controller
Robot controller

Service Settings Window

When is it shown?

The Service Settings window will be displayed when Service Settings is pressed in the Network Settings window as shown in the figure in section "Network Settings".

en0100000257

OK

returns to the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

Service Setting Parameter


IP Subnet mask Gateway

Description
Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer. Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer. Required to configure your PCs network settings for communication between RobInstall and the I/O Computer.

IP (service setting) The IP Address for the I/O Computer

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 192 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

System selection window

When is it shown?

The Select System window will be displayed when Select System is pressed in the Start window, as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

xx0100000171

CANCEL

returns to the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

How to select system

The window shows all systems installed on the controller mass storage memory.

Step
1.

Action
Select by moving the X to a desired system and press OK. The system will reboot with the new system and then display the Welcome window as shown in the figure.

Illustration/Info

xx0100000172

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

193

Controller
Robot controller

How to perform a Restart

General

Performing a restart may be done in a number of ways. These are detailed below:

Reboot (Warm start), apply changed settings

When executing a Warm start, the system reboots with the current system, e.g. to make new or changed settings take effect.

Step
1.

Action
Press the button Miscellaneous and select Service window or System Parameter window

Illustration/Info
Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2.

Select Restart from the File menu and press OK. The system reboots and returns to the Welcome window as shown in the second figure in section "Select System".

P-START, reinstallation of RAPID

A P-Start will warm start the current system, with a reinstallation of the RAPID language and all auto-loaded modules. This means that all RAPID program and system modules currently loaded in the working memory will be closed, and thus have to be reloaded again after the P-Start, with the exception of such modules that are automatically loaded, due to settings in the System Parameters/Controller/ Task Modules.

Step
1.

Action
Press the button Miscellaneous and select Service window.

Illustration/info
Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2.

Select Restart from the File menu.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 194 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Step
3. 4.

Action
Enter the numbers: 2_5_8 (the fifth function key changes to P-START) Press P-START. The system will reboot, reinstall RAPID and its auto-loaded modules, and return to the Welcome window as shown in the second figure in section "Select System".

Illustration/info

X-START, change active controller system

An X-start will exit the running system, store system data on the mass storage memory, and then execute the BootImage to display the Start window. Any system stored in the mass storage memory may then be selected as described in section "Select System". When performing an X-Start all stored system data will be restored (similar to performing a warm start).

Step
1.

Action
Press the button Miscellaneous and select Service window.

Illustration/Info
Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2. 3. 4.

Select Restart from the File menu. Enter the numbers: 1_5_9 (the fifth function key changes to X-START) Press X-START. The system will reboot and return to the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start Window".

I-START, start in Query mode

An I-start can be done if "Use Query Mode at System Boot" was selected when creating the running system in RobInstall (see section "Change options or system pack revision"). An I-Start will restart the current system and give the opportunity

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

195

Controller
Robot controller

to set some values at start-up, e.g. language, IRB type (within the same model) or options (see section "Start in Query Mode").

Step
1.

Action
Press the button Miscellaneous and selectService window.

Illustration/Info
Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2. 3. 4.

Select Restart from the File menu. Enter the numbers: 1_4_7 (the fifth function key changes to I-START). Press I-START. The system will start to reboot, then pause to ask for Silent, Easy, or Query mode. For more information on the different modes, continue to section "Start in Query Mode".

C-START (Cold start), delete the active system

When executing a C-Start, the system exits the running system and deletes it from the mass storage memory. The BootImage is then executed and the Start window as shown in the figure in section "Start Window" is displayed.
Use C-start with caution. Since it deletes the current system, it should not be used to just switch between installed systems. For this purpose, use X-Start (see section "X-start"). It will take quite some time to implement a Cold start. Just wait until the robot shows the Start window. When the Start window is shown, a new system can be selected if available in the mass storage memory (see section "Select System) or a new system can be downloaded and started (see section "Transfer Robot Controller System using Ethernet connection" or "Transfer Robot Controller System using floppy disks"). Do not touch any key, joystick, enable device, or emergency stop during the cold start until the Start window is shown as in the figure in section "Start Window".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 196 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Step
1.

Action
Press the button Miscellaneous and selectService window.

Illustration/Info
Miscellaneous button:

xx0100000194

2. 3. 4.

Select Restart from the File menu. Enter the numbers: 1_3_4_6_7_9 (the fifth function key changes to C-START) Press C-START.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

197

Controller
Robot controller

How to Start in Query Mode

Pre-conditions for selecting Query Mode start

If "Use Query Mode at System Boot" was selected when creating the system in RobInstall (see section "Change options or system pack revision"), it is possible to set some values, e.g. language, IRB type (within the same model) or options, at the first start-up of the system, using a C-Start (see section "C-start"), or later on when performing an I-Start (see section "I-start").

Types of Query Mode

The first question from the system is which Query Mode to start. Depending on your needs, you should select one of the following three:
Silent Mode, pushbutton Silent. If Silent Mode is selected, the operating system will be installed with the system configured as defined in RobInstall. Easy Query Mode, pushbutton Easy Query. In Easy Query Mode you can change language, remove selected options and select service or standard mode (see section "Easy Query Mode"). Query Mode, pushbutton Query. In Query Mode you can, as well as the things in Easy Query, select DC-link, change Robot type (within the same family) and for IRB 7600, select balancing unit (see section "Query Mode").

Easy Query Mode

If Easy Query was chosen as start-up query mode, the following steps will be required to start the system:

Step
1.

Action
Select Service/Standard motion param. Choose between standard or service motion parameters (pushbutton Stand / pushbutton Service). Choose TP Language. If there was another language than English selected in RobInstall (see section "Change options or system pack revision"), it will be possible to choose the language (pushbutton English /pushbutton "Other").

Illustration/Info

2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 198 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
Robot controller

Step
3.

Action
Install xxx? For every option that was selected in RobInstall (see section "Change options or system pack revision") it is now possible to select Yes to keep the option, or No to remove it from the system.

Illustration/Info

Query Mode

If Query Mode was chosen as start-up query mode, the following steps will be required to start the system:

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Select Service/Standard motion param. See section "Easy Query Mode", step 1. Choose TP Language. See section "Easy Query Mode", step 2. Select external axes config. You can find the article number of the DC-link used on the unit inside the controller, then use the table below to find out the configuration ID for that DC-link.

Illustration/info

4.

Select xxxx model. Choose Robot model type within in the same family, e.g. 1400, 6400 etc. If there are more than three options, press pushbutton SCAN to view them. Install xxx. See section "Easy Query Mode", step 3.

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

199

Controller
System directory structure

Section G: System directory structure Media pool in the PC

Directory

All RobotWare System Packages and Option Packages are stored in a media pool directory (folder) as shown in the table below. Two revisions of the same system package may exist in the pool. By default, after having installed RobInstall, a directory "MediaPool" will be found in the directory Program Files\ABB Robotics\, and will also be the current one. However any directory in the structure can be set up as the current media pool in the Preference window (see section "Robinstall Preferences").

xx0100000259

Art. no./folder name


3HAXaaaa-1.00 3HAXbbbb-1.02 3HAXcccc-1.01 3HYZdddd-1.00

Description
RobotWare System Pack 3HAXaaaa-1, rev 00 RobotWare System Pack 3HAXbbbb-1, rev 02 ABB Robotics external option program 3HAXcccc-1, rev 01 OEM customer external option program 3XYZdddd-1, rev 00

Naming conventions

Each package is stored in a directory, the name of which is an article number ending with the sub-number and with the revision number as shown in the table above. All the system packs and option packs in one media pool must have the correct revision numbers in their directory names. Thus a later revision can be loaded into the program pool, to be added to the old one, without changing the article number.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 200 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
System directory structure

System pool in the PC

Directory

All systems created with the RobInstall will be stored in a system pool. The default name of such a system pool is "system" as shown below. Each system stored in the system pool is a directory with the name of the system as shown in the table below. By default, after installing RobInstall, a directory "system" will be found in Program Files\ABB Robotics\ and will also be the current one. However any directory in the structure can be set up as the current system directory in the Create New System window or Select System window.

Directory view

Folder "System 1"

xx0100000260

xx0100000261

File system requirements

The system directory must hold these files and directories to allow software installation:
key.id (encrypted key file for the actual controller) program.id (file with paths to selected programs in the media pool) A syspar directory containing .cfg files to be included in the software installation procedure. All system parameter files, included when creating a system with RobInstall, are stored in this syspar directory as shown in the table in section "System Pool Directory". A directory called Home. In this home directory the user can include any file or files, which should be downloaded to the controller together with the operating system. Such files will then be placed in the home directory of the system in the controller.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

201

Controller
System directory structure

File structure in the robot controller mass storage memory

Files in root directory, hd0a

The root directory of the mass storage memory is called hd0a. This includes several components:

File name
bin BootRom.sys MC.cfg ctrl.bin system.dir system directories

Description
BootImage code System configuration and description file for the mass storage memory Network configuration for the main computer Holds e.g. revolution counter values Holds information on the current system Different systems stored in the mass storage memory

E.g. 3HAC6811-1.00 Control system package, named as an article number

Directories and subdirectories

Each system directory holds a number of subdirectories, defining for instance language, options, robots, etc.

"Home" directory

The system directory is the "home" directory for the system. When using the address "home:" in the RAPID program, this directory will be addressed.

"Bin" subdirectory

The subdirectory bin, containing the storage area for all system data, e.g. at power break. This means that at warm start, in addition to restoring the operating system from the control system package, all system data is restored from this directory and reloaded into the working memory.

Never change these directories!

Never delete or change the \bin or BootRom.sys directories in the root directory. If this is done, the controller cannot be restarted and it will be impossible to use the mass storage memory.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 202 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
System directory structure

Preparation of S4Cplus software to be installed

Illustration
Media pool S ystem Pack in /3haxbbbb-1.nn *.* si gnature no S ystem pool

E xt Option in /3haxcccc1.nn *.* relkey.txt

Created files key.id program.id

E xternal option from disk or CD-R OM

My syst em /syst em_n key.id program.id keystr.txt /syspar *.cfg

S ystem Pack from R obotWare CD-R OM

Inserted key strings are saved in keystr.txt R obotWare keystrings define the options to be included from the S ystem Pack they belong to and E xt opt keystrings define added external option packa ges. All keys must have the same serial number.

xx0100000262

Files to be prepared

The list details what happens during preparation:


RobInstall creates a file named Key.id from the key strings specifying the options to be installed from the System Pack and the external option programs to be installed. Unless deselected in RobInstall, the latest revision of the System Pack and External Option Programs is selected as default (see section "Change options or system pack revisions"). These are copied from the media pool and concatenated into one target file that also holds the key.id and the syspar directory. This may then be downloaded to the controller via Ethernet or a set of diskettes. The target file is temporarily stored in the system directory before downloading or creating diskettes.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

203

Controller
System directory structure

Handling mass memory storage capacity

General

In some cases it is very important that there is enough free space in the mass storage memory, before attempting to download new system software. How to check its capacity, and if required increase it, is detailed below. A manual check on the free space can be done in one of the following ways:

Checking storage capacity from the Teach Pendant Unit

1. Press the button Miscellaneous to select Service window. 2. Select Storage Capacity from the System Info menu. The Mass Storage Memory is called hd0a.

Checking storage capacity through connection to the MC/CONSOLE port

1. Connect a console to the MC/CONSOLE outlet on the controller and execute the command dosFsShow.

There should always be at least 25 Mb free disk space on the controller mass storage memory before attempting to download a new system. For information on how to increase storage capacity, see below!

Increasing storage capacity

If the capacity of the mass storage memory is less than 25 Mb when a new controller system is to be downloaded, storage memory must be released by removing old systems from the mass storage memory. This can be done in one of the following ways: 1. Boot up on the system you would like to remove and then make a CSTART (see section "C-start"). 2. Use the FileManager in the Teach Pendant Unit, see Users Guide - File Manager, for more information on how to use the FileManager. 3. Use a third-party "ftp" client (like FTPVoyager supplied on the RobotWare CD).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 204 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller
System directory structure

Removing systems using the FileManager or FTP-client may be hazardous since the \bin and BootRom.sys directories must be kept intact. Proceed with the utmost care to avoid accidentally removing such files or directories!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

205

Controller
System directory structure

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 206 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration

Chapter 5:Calibration
When to calibrate

Types of calibration procedures

Calibrate the measurement system carefully if any of the resolver values has been changed. This may occur when parts affecting the calibration position have been replaced on the robot. Calibrate the system roughly as detailed in section "Updating the revolution counter" if the contents of the revolution counter memory are lost. This may occur when:
the battery is discharged a resolver error occurs the signal between a resolver and measurement board is interrupted a robot axis has been moved with the control system disconnected

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

207

Calibration
General

Section A: General How to calibrate the robot system

General

This section provides an overview of the procedure required when calibrating the robot system. Many of the steps in the procedure are detailed in other sections to which references are given.

Procedure Step
1.

Action
Check that all required hardware is available for calibrating the robot.

Note/Illustration
Required hardware is specified in the calibrating procedures for each axis.

2.

Check the correct orientation of axis 4. Detailed in "Correct orientation Incorrect orientation of the axis may of axes". cause damage on cabling! Manually, run the robot axes to a posi- Use the calibration scales or distion close to the correct calibration tances to locate this position, position. detailed in "Correct orientation of axes". Start the calibration procedure on the TPU. Calibrate each axis. Verify that the calibration was successfully carried out. Detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU". Detailed in "Fine calibration, all axes". Detailed in "Post calibration procedure".

3.

4. 5. 6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 208 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
General

Additional information

In addition to the basic calibration procedure detailed above, a number of calibration related actions may be performed:

Action
How to update the robot revolution counter without performing a complete calibration.

Detailed in section:
Updating the revolution counter

How to manually check the current calibration Checking the calibration position position.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

209

Calibration
General

Calibration tool kit, contents

Calibration tool kit, 3HAC xxxxx-x

The calibration tool kit, 3HAC xxxxx-x, can be ordered from ABB Automation Technologies AB, Robotics. The kit contains:
Digital indicator Magnetic stand Calibration tool for actuator Calibration tool for wrist Tool case

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 210 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Section B: Preliminaries Correct orientation of axes

General

This section details the correct orientation of all axes. The orientation of axis 4 must be especially checked and corrected if necessary before performing any calibration!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

211

Calibration
Preliminaries

Index marks

The figure below shows the index marks of axes 4-5-6 and the correct position of the spiral cable. It also shows the calibration distance on axes 1-2-3.

C B G D

E
xx0200000341

F
E F G Index marks for axis 5 Index marks for axis 6 Calibration distance for axes 12-3: 26 mm on each axis

A B C D

Axis 4 (center tube) Spiral cable inspection cover Correct orientation of the spiral cable (and axis 4) Index marks for axis 4

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 212 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Correct position of axes 1-2-3

The axes 1-2-3 should be positioned with an approximate distance of 26 mm between the actuator and the calibration spacer above the lower joint, shown in figure above. This distance is set exactly during the fine calibration procedure.

Correct orientation of axis 4

The procedure below details how to check and eventually correct the orientation of axis 4.
Axis 4 has no mechanical limitation! Cabling inside the manipulator may be damaged if axis 4 is oriented incorrectly when performing calibration of the robot!

If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points must be observed: The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link or remote control panel. The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the working space. The position 100%full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails.

Step Action

Note

1. Remove the spiral cable inspection cover on Shown in figure above! the center tube sleeve by removing its 4 attachment screws. 2. Make a visual check of the numbers, marked Directions detailed in part on the spiral cable. Directions for all axes. The numbers 4-3-2-1 must be positioned in a straight line, as shown in figure above! In case the index marks are not present: make sure that the normal vector of the face of the gearbox, axis 5, is pointing in approximate (+ / - a couple of degrees) +Y direction! 3. In case correction is necessary, turn axis 4 with the TPU into the approximate calibration position by positioning the numbers into a straight line!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

213

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step Action
4. Refit the spiral cable inspection cover with the 4 attachment screws!

Note

Correct orientation of axes 5-6

The procedure below details the correct orientation of axes 5-6.

Step
1.

Action
Make sure that the index marks of axis 5 are roughly aligned. In case the index marks are not present: make sure that the normal vector of the face of the tool flange is pointing approximately (+ / - a couple of degrees) in the +Z direction (positive)! Make sure that the index marks of axis 6 are roughly aligned. In case the index marks are not present: make sure that the hole for the guide pin in the tool flange is pointing approximately (+ / a couple of degrees) in the -X direction (negative)!

Note/Illustration
Location shown in figure above! Directions detailed in part Directions for all axes.

2.

Location shown in figure above! Directions detailed in part Directions for all axes.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 214 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Checking the calibration position

General

Check the calibration position before beginning any programming of the robot system. This may be done as detailed below.

Using the Jogging window on the teach pendant

Step
1.

Action
Open the Jogging window.

Note/Illustration

xx0100000195

2.

Choose running axis-by-axis.

xx0100000196

3.

Check that the positions of axes 1-2-3 are reached and that the calibration marks on axes 4-5-6 are aligned correctly. If they are not, update the revolution counters as detailed in "Update the revolution counter".

Calibration positions and marks for each axis are shown in section "Correct orientation of axes".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

215

Calibration
Preliminaries

Updating the revolution counter

Manually running the manipulator to the sync position

This section details the first step when updating the revolution counter; manually running the manipulator to the synchronization position.

Axis 4 has no mechanical limitation! Cabling inside manipulator may be damaged if axis 4 is oriented incorrectly when performing calibration of the robot!
the

Step
1. 2.

Action
Select axis-by-axis motion mode

Illustration

Press the enabling device on the teach pen- Calibration marks shown dant and, using the joystick, move the robot in section "Correct orienmanually so that the calibration marks or dis- tation of axes". tances lie within the tolerance zone. Note that axis 6 does not have any mechanical stop and can thus be calibrated at the wrong faceplate revolution. Do not operate axis 6 manually before the robot has been calibrated. When all axes have been positioned as above, store the revolution counter settings using the Teach Pendant Unit as detailed below:

3.

4.

Storing the revolution counter setting

This section details the second step when updating the revolution counter; storing the revolution counter settings.

If a revolution counter is incorrectly updated, it will cause incorrect robot positioning, which in turn may cause damage or injury!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 216 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
1.

Action
Press the button "Miscellaneous".

Illustration

xx0100000194

2.

Select the Service window by pressing ENTER.

xx0100000200

3.

Select Calibration from the View menu. The Calibration window appears.

xx0100000201

4.

Select the desired unit and choose Rev Counter Update from the Calib menu. The Revolution Counter Update window appears.

xx0100000202

5.

Select the desired axis and press Incl to include it (it will be marked with an x) or press All to select all axes.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

217

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
6.

Action
Press OK when all axes that are to be updated are marked with an x. CANCEL returns to the Calibration window. Press OK again to confirm and start the update. CANCEL returns to the Revolution Counter Update window. At this point, it is recommended that the revolution counter values are saved to a diskette. Recheck the calibration position as described in "Checking the calibration position".

Illustration

7.

8.

Not required.

9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 218 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Fine calibration procedure on TPU

General

The section below details how to use the Teach Pendant Unit (TPU) when performing a fine-calibration of the robot.

Procedure Step
1.

Action
Press the button "Miscellaneous".

Note/Illustration

xx0100000194

2.

Select the Service window by pressing ENTER.

xx0100000200

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

219

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
3.

Action
Choose Calibration from the View menu. The Calibration window appears.

Note/Illustration

xx0100000201

Explanation of status: Synchronized: all axes are calibrated and their positions are known. The unit is ready for use. Revolution Counter not updated: all axes are fine-calibrated but one (or more) of the axes has a counter that is NOT updated. This axis, or these axes, must therefore be updated as described in "Updating the revolution counter". Not calibrated: one (or more) of the axis is NOT fine-calibrated. This axis, or these axes, must therefore be fine-calibrated as described in "Fine calibration".

4.

Select the desired unit and choose Fine Calibrate from the Calib menu. A Warning window appears.

xx0100000203

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 220 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Preliminaries

Step
5.

Action
Move the manipulator to its calibration position and press OK. The Fine Calibrate window appears.

Note/Illustration
Calibration positions for the manipulator detailed in "Checking the calibration position".

xx0100000204

6.

Select the desired axis and press Incl to include it (it will be marked with an x) or press All to select all axes. Press OK when all axes that are to be updated are marked with an x. CANCEL returns to the Calibration window. Press OK again to confirm and start the update. CANCEL returns to the Fine Calibration window. An alert box is displayed during calibration. The Status window appears when the fine calibration is complete. The revolution counters are always updated at the same time as the calibration is performed.

7.

8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

221

Calibration
Calibration

Section C: Calibration Directions for all axes

Calibration movement directions

The figure below shows the positive and negative directions for each axis.

+
4

+ + + +
5

+ 6
xx0200000355

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 222 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Calibration

Jogging directions

The figure below shows the linear directions when jogging the robot.

+Y

+X

+Z

+Z

xx0200000378

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

223

Calibration
Calibration

Fine calibration, all axes

Introduction

This section details how to calibrate the complete robot, using calibration tools. The section is divided into the following parts:
Before calibration Required equipment Calibration order Calibration, axes 1, 2 and 3 Calibration, axis 5 Calibration, axis 6 Calibration, axis 4

Before calibration

Before calibrating the robot, make sure that the requirements in the previous sections "General" and "Preliminaries" are met!

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Calibration tool kit

Art. no.
-

Note
Contains tools for calibration of complete robot. May be ordered from ABB Automation Technologies AB, Robotics.

Calibration order

The order of calibration of the axes 1, 2 and 3 is of no importance, but the remaining axes must be calibrated in the following sequence: 5 - 6 - 4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 224 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration axis 1, 2 and 3

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 1, but it is the same for axes 2 and 3. Calibrate one axis at a time and then repeat the procedure for the remaining axes.

Step
1. 2.

Action
Turn the operating mode selector to MANUAL MODE AT REDUCED SPEED. Operate current axis (axis 1, 2 or 3) in manual mode with the joystick until only 40-50 mm of the movable part of the actuator is visible. Insert the gauge block between the platform and the actuator cover (see adjacent figure) and then gently contract the actuator until the gauge block fits exactly but is not jammed. Note! All three actuators should have approximately the same length when one of them is calibrated.

Note/Illustration

3.

xx0200000351

4. Update only the current axis (axis 1, 2 or 3) as detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU". Remove the calibration tools.

A: 26 mm

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

225

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration, axis 5

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 5.

Step
1.

Action
Put a dial gauge (mounted on a support positioned on a flat surface external to the robot) against the edge of the tool flange as shown in the adjacent figure. The purpose of this procedure is to adjust axis 5 so that it is possible to rotate axis 4 without reading any offset on the indicator.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000352

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 226 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Calibration

Step
2.

Action
Lock all other axes when jogging axis 4. Rotate axis 4 in joint +180 degrees. Rotate axis 5 to compensate for half the value read on the indicator (i.e. the indicator shows 0.58 mm, move axis 5 gently until the indicator shows 0.29). Rotate axis 4 -180 degrees (=back to the starting position, 0 degrees). Repeat until it is possible to rotate axis 4 180 degrees without reading any error on the gauge. Normally, it requires 2-4 attempts.

Note/Illustration

3. 4.

Update only axis 5, as detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU". Remove the calibration tools.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

227

Calibration
Calibration

Calibration axis 6

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 6.

Step
1.

Action
Run the following axis to the specified position: Axis 5: -90 degrees. Fit the wrist calibration tool at the tool flange and put a dial gauge (mounted on as support positioned on a flat surface external to the robot) against the edge of the tool, see the adjacent figure.

Note/Illustration

2.

xx0200000353

3.

Lock all other linear directions except Directions shown in Directions for Z. for all axes.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 228 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
Calibration

Step
4.

Action

Note/Illustration

Move the robot in +/-Z (in base) and Directions shown in Directions adjust axis 6 until the indicator shows for all axes. minimum change (usually a few hundredths of a millimeter) while travelling from the middle of the tool to one end (i.e. if the indicator shows 0.46 mm while travelling from the center of the tool to one end of the tool, rotate axis 6 by 0.46 mm). Update only axis 6, as detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU". Remove the calibration tools.

5. 6.

Calibration, axis 4

The procedure below details how to calibrate axis 4.

Step
1.

Action
Run the following axes to the specified positions: Axis 5: -90 degrees. Axis 6: +90 degrees. Axis 4: 0 degrees.

Note/Illustration

2.

Put a dial gauge (mounted on a support positioned on a flat surface external to the robot) against the ground face of the tool, see the adjacent figure.

xx0200000354

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

229

Calibration
Calibration

Step
3. 4.

Action
Lock all other linear directions except for Y.

Note/Illustration
Directions shown in Directions for all axes.

Move the robot in +/-Y (in Directions shown in Directions for all base) and adjust axis 4 until axes. the indicator shows minimum change (usually a few hundredths of a millimeter) while travelling from the middle of the tool to one end (i.e. if the indicator shows 0.52 mm while travelling from the center of the tool to one end of the tool, rotate axis 4 by 0.52 mm). Update only axis 4, as detailed in "Fine calibration procedure on TPU". Remove the calibration tools.

5.

6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 230 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Calibration
After calibration

Section D: After calibration Post calibration procedure

General

Perform the following procedure after calibrating any manipulator axes. The procedure is intended to verify that all calibration positions are correct.

Procedure Step
1.

Action

Illustration

Run the calibration home position program Detailed in "Checking the twice. calibration position". Do not change the position of the manipulator axes after running the program! Check all calibration positions. Repeat the check as above. Adjust the calibration marks when the calibra- Shown in section "Cortion is done. rect orientation of axes". The system parameters will be saved to the storage memory at power off. Remove any calibration equipment from the manipulator. Detailed in "Checking the calibration position".

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

231

Calibration
After calibration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 232 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

233

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 234 3HAC 16638-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Repair Manual
Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept
3HAC 16640-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics S-721 68 VSTERS SWEDEN Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000 Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Repair Manual, IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16640-1
-

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein. This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted. Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved. ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics SE-721 68 Vsters Sweden

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Overview Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept Chapter 1: Safety, service Introduction Safety, service - General
Section A: References

1 3 5 5 6
7

Limitation of Liability Applicable Safety Standards Related information


Section B: Safety risks

7 7 8
9

Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

9 9 9 10 10 11
13

Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulator's arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit Work inside the manipulators working range Chapter 2: Reference Information Introduction Screw joints Weight specifications Chapter 3: Manipulator Introduction
Section A: Manipulator repairs

13 13 14 14 15 15 15 17 17 18 20 21 21
22

Removal of actuator, including motor Refitting of actuator, including motor Removal of servomotor, axes 1-3 Refitting of servomotor, axes 1-3 Removal of servomotor, axis 4

22 27 34 38 43

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Refitting of servomotor, axis 4 Removal of lower joint Refitting of lower joint Removal of wrist Refitting of wrist Removal of center unit Refitting of center unit Removal of spiral cable Refitting of spiral cable
Section B: Distribution box repairs

49 55 58 62 67 72 77 82 85
89

Replacement of battery, distribution box Replacement of serial measurement card, distribution box Replacement of brake release card, distribution box Chapter 4: Controller Introduction Putting the computer unit in the service position Replacement of air filter, controller Replacement of battery unit, controller Replacement of I/O and gateway units Replacement of bleeder resistor Replacement of mass storage memory Replacement of internal cooling fan Replacement of drive units and rectifier Replacement of system fan unit Replacement of power supply unit Chapter 5: Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept Introduction =M1/2, Potentials from control =M1/3, Axis 1 =M1/4, Axis 2 =M1/5, Axis 3 =M1/6, Axis 4 =M1/7, Axis 5 =M1/8, Axis 6 =M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connections =M/10, Brake release unit

89 92 95 99 99 100 103 106 109 113 116 120 125 129 132 135 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 144

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] ii document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16640-1 The delete

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus Introduction


System 1: General information

145 145
146

Sheet 1-1. Block Diagram Sheet 1-2. View of Control Cabinet Sheet 1-3. View of Control Cabinet Sheet 1-4. Designation Sheet 1-5. Designation
System 2: Mains Connection and Power Supply

146 147 148 149 150


151

Sheet 2-1. Mains Connection Sheet 2-2. Transformer Unit Sheet 2-3. Power Supply Sheet 2-4. Power Supply Sheet 2-5. External transformer unit 200-500V IRB6600/7600 Sheet 2-6. Transformer unit 400-475V IRB 6600/7600
System 3: Computer Unit and Connector Unit

151 152 153 154 155 156


157

Sheet 3-1. Block Diagram/Computer Unit Sheet 3-2. Cabling in Computer Unit Sheet 3-3. Main Computer and Hard Disk / Flash Disk Drive Sheet 3-4. Compute Cooling Sheet 3-5. Base Connector Board and I/O Computer Sheet 3-6. Connector Board and I/O Computer Sheet 3-7. Connector Board and Axis Computer Sheet 3-8. Base Connector Unit Sheet 3-9. Connector Plate on Controller Panel
System 4: Emergency Stops and Run Chain

157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165


166

Sheet 4-1. Emergency Stop Sheet 4-2. Run Chain Sheet 4-3. Run Chain Sheet 4-4. Power Unit Servo Disconnector
System 5: Drive System and Robot Cable

166 167 168 169


170

Sheet 5-1. Block Diagram Sheet 5-2. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder Sheet 5-3. Drive System Signal Connection 2 Drive Units Sheet 5-4. Drive System Signal Connection 3 Drive Units Sheet 5-5. Servo Drive Units / IRB 140 Sheet 5-6. Servo Drive Units / IRB 340 Sheet 5-7. Servo Drive Units / IRB 640, 840 Sheet 5-8. Servo Drive Units / IRB 1400, 2400

170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

iii

Table of Contents

Sheet 5-9. Servo Drive Units / IRB 4400, 6400S/PE Sheet 5-10. Servo Drive Units / IRB 6400R Sheet 5-11. Control Cable IRB 140 Sheet 5-12. Control Cable IRB 340, 1400 and 2400 Sheet 5-13. Control Cable IRB 640, 840, 4400 and 6400S/PE Sheet 5-14. Control Cable IRB 6400R Sheet 5-15. Rectifier, fans and bleeder Sheet 5-16. Servo Drive System Sheet 5-17. Control cable
System 6: External axes

178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186


187

Sheet 6-1. External axes Sheet 6-2. Axes Computer 2 and Connector Board Sheet 6-3. Expansion Board Axis Connector Board Sheet 6-4. Drive System Signal Connection External Axes Sheet 6-5. External axes no. 7th - 9th Control Signal Connection Sheet 6-6. Axis Computer 2 and Axis Connector Unit if External Axis Cabinet Sheet 6-7. Connection to External Axis Cabinet Sheet 6-8. Servogun-SMB power/signals cable
System 7: I/O Units and Field Bus Modules

187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194


195

Sheet 7-1. I/O Unit Position Sheet 7-2. Digital Part of Combi I/O and Digital I/O Unit Input Part Sheet 7-3. Digital I/O Unit Output Part Sheet 7-4. Combi I/O Unit Digital and Analogue Output Part Sheet 7-5. Digital Input Part of 120V AC I/O Unit Sheet 7-6. Digital Output Part of 120V AC I/O Unit Sheet 7-7. Relay I/O Unit Input 1-16 Sheet 7-8. Digital with Relays I/O Output 1-8 Sheet 7-9. Digital with Relays I/O Output 9-16 Sheet 7-10. Analogue I/O Unit Sheet 7-11. Remote I/O Unit For Allen Bradley PLC Sheet 7-12. Interbus-S Master/Slave - Interbus-S Master Sheet 7-13. Profibus DP SLave Sheet 7-14. Encoder Unit Sheet 7-15. Profibus DP Master/Slave Sheet 7-16. Interbus master/slave optical fibre and copper wire
System 8: Other options

195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210
211

Sheet 8-1. Floppy Disk Sheet 8-2. Service Equipment Supply Sheet 8-3. External Connections System Signals Sheet 8-4. Position Switches on Manipulator

211 212 213 214

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] iv document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16640-1 The delete

Table of Contents

Sheet 8-5. Customer Signals Sheet 8-6. Sustomer Power/SIgnal IRB 2400, 4400, 6400S/PE Sheet 8-7. Customer Cable Power/Signal/CAN IRB 6400R Sheet 8-8. External Control Panel Sheet 8-9. Extension Cable Teach Pendant Sheet 8-10. Time Relay Sheet 8-11. Customer Precess / Power / Signal / Profibus DP M/S Sheet 8-12. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R Sheet 8-13. LAN Ethernet connection Sheet 8-14. Customer power/CAN-BUS IRB 640/6400S Sheet 8-15. Customer cable power/signal CAN-BUS IRB 6600/7600 Sheet 8-16. Customer cable power/signal Profibus IRB 6600/7600 Sheet 8-17. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R
System 9: External Axis Cabinet

215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227
228

Sheet 9-1. Block Diagram Sheet 9-2. View of External Axis Cabinet Sheet 9-3. Designation Sheet 9-4. Mains Connection Sheet 9-5. Transformer Unit Sheet 9-6. Power Supply, I/O Supply Sheet 9-7. Power Unit Sheet 9-8. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder Sheet 9-9. Drive Unit Signal Connection 1 External Drive Unit Sheet 9-10. Drive Unit Signal Connection 2 External Drive Units Sheet 9-11. Drive Unit Signal Connection 3 External Drive Units Sheet 9-12. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT Sheet 9-13. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT+CCB Sheet 9-14. Drive Unit and Control Cable Sheet 9-15. Service Equipment Supply

228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] vi document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16640-1 The delete

Overview

About This Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for repairing the complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during repair work.

Who Should Read This Manual?

This manual is intended for:


repair personnel in the users organization. repair personnel in other organizations.

Prerequisites

The reader should...


be a trained repair craftsman have the required knowledge of mechanical repair work OR have the required knowledge of electrical repair work.

Organization of Chapters

The manual is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter
1. 2. 3. 4.

Contents
Safety Reference information Manipulator Controller

References Reference
Circuit diagrams, Manipulator

Document Id
Included in Repair Manual, 3HAC 16640-1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Reference
Circuit diagrams, Controller

Document Id
Included in Repair Manual, 3HAC 16640-1

Revisions Revision
-

Description
First edition

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 2 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists of several manuals listed below:

Overview, Installation and Commissioning Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:
Safety, Service Reference Information Unpacking On-site Installation Electrical connections Start-up Robot controller Installation of controller software System directory structure Calibration

Overview, Repair Manual

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare parts Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered spare parts Circuit Diagram for manipulator Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

Overview, Maintenance Manual

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Maintenance schedules Maintenance activities Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 4 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter "Safety, service" is divided into the following sections: A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability applicable safety standards referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system. The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid dangers.
Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulators arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device Work inside the manipulators working range

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards and regulations of the country where the robot is installed. The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of external safety devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral equipment as well as from the robot. In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 6 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
References

Section A: References Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:


EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles EN 775, Robot safety EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure) (EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains) EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments (EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test) (EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test) (EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields) (EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity test)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents Type of information


Installation of safety devices Changing robot modes

Detailed in document
Installation and Commissioning Manual User s Guide

Section

Start-up

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 8 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks Safety risks related to end effector


Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating. It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken. The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before starting to repair them. Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Safe design

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop. Dump valves should be used in case of emergency. Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different industrial applications. All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the applicable safety regulations. Care must be taken at all times.

Qualified personnel

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated with its different parts.

Extraordinary risks

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation and service

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning must always be followed. Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so that the robot can be stopped quickly. Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are available for the installation in question. Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

Nation/region specific regulations

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 10 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage related risks

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are suitable devices. Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the robot's working space. The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released or when the motors or other components are removed. When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling objects. Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller. Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the robot.

To be observed by the supplier of the complete system

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function. The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related risks, general

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads and disconnecting or connecting units. The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can be turned off outside the robots working space.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related risks, controller, S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:


Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller. Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power from an external source. The mains supply/mains switch The power unit The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC) The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!) The drive unit (700 VDC) The service outlets (115/230 VAC) The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the machining process The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even when the robot is disconnected from the mains. Additional connections

Voltage related risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:


The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC) The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC) The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

Voltage related risks, tools, material handling devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working process may be damaged.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 12 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:


- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made from suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces involved and appropriate materials. - insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values. Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation. - isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot (manipulator or controller)!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the brakes" in the Installation Manual. The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed below: 1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load). 2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating mode selector on the controller. 3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then the brake function is adequate.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 14 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit (TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the MOTORS OFF state. To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented: The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way. During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as there is no need for the robot to move. The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points must be observed: The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link or remote control panel. The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails. Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 16 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller. The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic materials and does not apply to soft or brittle materials. Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the tables below:

Screws with slotted or cross recess head

Dimension
M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"


0.25 0.5 1.2 2.5 5.0

Screws with hexagon socket head

Dimension
M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


6 10 24 47 82

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


28 55 95

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


17 40 70 120

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 18 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Dimension
M16

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


200

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


235

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


300

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

Within all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are highlighted in this way. ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 20 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator

Chapter 3:Manipulator
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all repair activities recommended for the manipulator, including the manipulators distribution box. It is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific repair activity, e.g. Removal or Refitting of a certain component on the manipulator. Each unit contains all information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials. The chapter is divided into:
Removal/refitting instructions for all the spare parts on the manipulator Replacement instructions for all the spare parts in the manipulators distribution box

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

21

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Section A: Manipulator repairs Removal of actuator, including motor

Location

The three actuators are located on the manipulator as shown in the figure below.

D A

C
xx0200000296

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 22 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

A B C D E F

Actuator Actuator servomotor Lower joint Actuator fork Center tube Wrist

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Hook wrench

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
3 mm pin, shown in figure the below!

xx0200000350

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

23

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing to remove an actuator.

Step
1.

Action
Run the actuators to half way in length, and ensure all the actuators are of equal length. This is done in order to allow the actuator to retract when the lower joint is unscrewed. Switch off the power supply.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

The weight of an actuator is around 40kg (88lb). Shown in the figure Before removal, the actuator must therefore be above! secured using straps, as the center unit will tend to move away from the corner with the removed actuator. If the manipulator is vertically orientated, it is important to anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to prevent this. For other orientations, try to anticipate the movement and secure accordingly.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 24 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of actuator

The procedure below details how to remove an actuator, including the motor. The procedure is the same for all actuators. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removing an actuator!

Step
1.

Action
Remove the eletric cabling from the servomotor located on the actuator to be removed. Move and secure the cabling so it can not get damaged during removal of the actuator. Secure the actuator from above using straps from a hoist or from the forks of a fork lift. Use a heating gun to loosen the threadlocking substance, before unscrewing the lower joint from the lower platform.

Note/Illustration

2.

3.

4.

To release the bottom end of the actuator Shown in the figure above! from the lower platform, unscrew the lower Specified above! joint using thehook wrench. Make sure the center tube and wrist are anchored as detailed in the preparatory work above! Unscrew the four attachment screws hold- Shown in the figure above! ing the actuator to the actuator fork. Gently remove the actuator and lift it safely to a flat surface. Inspect the actuator fork and the thread in the lower platform for damage. If only the actuator is to be replaced, remove the servomotor as detailed below.

5. 6. 7. 8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

25

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of motor

The procedure below details how to remove the motor from a dismounted actuator.

Step
1.

Action
Unscrew the four fixing screws that hold the servomotor to the actuator housing.

Note/Illustration

A B D C
xx0200000302

2. 3. Remove the servomotor from the actuator. If the toothed wheel ring stays with the backlash-free coupling attached to the actuator (shown in the figure above), detach it and fit it to the coupling on the servomotor. Remove the coupling from the actuator shaft.

A: Servomotor B: Fixing screws (4 pcs) C: Toothed wheel ring D: Backlash-free coupling

4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 26 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of actuator, including motor

Location

The actuators are located as shown in the figure below.

D A

C
xx0200000296

A B

Actuator Actuator servomotor

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

27

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

C D E F

Lower joint Actuator fork Center tube Wrist

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Actuator with motor Thread-locking substance

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 17151-1

Note
e.g. Loctite 242. Used when securing the lower joint to the lower platform. 3 mm pin

Hook wrench

xx0200000350

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 28 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets. The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

Refitting of motor

In case the servomotor has been removed from the actuator, refit it as detailed in procedure below.

Step
1.

Action
Fit the backlash-free coupling onto the new actuator. Make sure the shaft lies flush with the coupling surface, as shown in figure to the right.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000303

A: Actuator shaft B: 0mm

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

29

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Assemble the servomotor, back- 4 pcs; tightening torque: 24 Nm. lash-free coupling and the actuator. Tighten the fixing screws of the motor.

A B D C
xx0200000302

A: Servomotor B: Fixing screws (4 pcs) C: Toothed wheel ring D: Backlash-free coupling

Refitting of actuator

The procedure below details how to refit the actuator, including the motor. The procedure is the same for all actuators.

Step
1. 2.

Action
Refit the motor, in case it has been removed, as detailed above. Place the actuator in the actuator fork by lifting it with a hoist.

Note/Illustration

Shown in the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 30 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action
Push the actuator to the left so that it is flush with the left hand side of the fork, as shown with the arrow in figure to the right. The direction is the same for all three actuators.

Note/Illustration

A B
xx0200000304

4. Adjust the circlip so that the actuator remains tight against the left hand side.

A: Clamp B: Circlip

5.

Fit the clamps and tighten the four 4 pcs; tightening torque: 10 Nm. hexagonal screws that hold the clamps. Fit the sealing caps onto either side of the actuator fork as shown in figure to the right.

6.

xx0200000305

A: Sealing cap

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

31

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
7.

Action

Note/Illustration

Refit the actuator by screwing the Shown in the figure above! lower joint to the lower platform. Use normal thread-locking fluid. Note that, as each turn of the lower joint will alter the length of the actuator by 10 mm, the actuator will be extended around 150 mm as the universal joint is screwed in. Attach the supplied labels to the actuator and motor; the warning label close to the actuator fork and the appropriate axis label on the housing of the actuator. Reconnect the cables to the servomotor.

8.

9.

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting an actuator.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace. Recalibrate the robot. Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment. When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

Note/Illustration

2.

Detailed in Installation Manual.

3.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 32 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

- all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

33

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of servomotor, axes 1-3

Location

The servomotors of axes 1, 2 and 3 are located on top of the actuators, as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000297

Servomotors, axes 1-3

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 34 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Circuit Diagram 3HAC 16640-1

Note
Repair Manual, part 2

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of a motor.

Step
1.

Action
Support the wrist before disconnecting the servomotor from the actuator, in order to keep the lower platform stable and reduce the risk of injury and/or damage. Switch off the power supply. The weight of an actuator servomotor is around 14kg (31lb). The actuator may therefore need to be secured using straps before being removed.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

35

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action
The actuator is free to turn when the servomotor is removed. If not correctly supported, the center unit will tend to move away from the corner with the removed actuator servomotor. In a vertically orientated manipulator, it is important to anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to prevent this. For manipulators in other orientations, try to anticipate the movement and secure accordingly.

Note/Illustration

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the servomotor, axes 1, 2 and 3.

Step
1.

Action
Remove the eletric cabling from the servomotor. Move and secure the cabling so that it can not get damaged during the removal of the actuator. Unscrew the four fixing screws that hold the servomotor to the actuator housing, as shown in the figure below. Lift the servomotor straight up from the actuator.

Note/Illustration

2.

3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 36 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action
If the toothed wheel ring stays with the backlash-free coupling attached to the servomotor, detach it and fit it to the coupling on the actuator.

Note/Illustration

A B D C
xx0200000302

5. Remove the coupling from the servomotor shaft.

A: Servomotor B: Fixing screws (4 pcs) C: Toothed wheel ring D: Backlash-free coupling on servomotor shaft

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

37

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of servomotor, axes 1-3

Location

The servomotors of axes 1, 2 and 3 are located on top of the actuators, as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000297

Servomotors, axes 1-3

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 38 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Servomotor, axes 1-3 Circuit Diagram 3HAC 17152-1 3HAC 16640-1 Repair Manual, part 2

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before the refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the servomotor, axes 1-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

39

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the backlash-free coupling Spare part no. specified above! onto the new servomotor, ensuring that the shaft enters the coupling to a depth of 10 mm, as shown in figure to the right.

A
xx0200000308

A: 10 0.5 mm

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 40 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Assemble the servomotor, 4 pcs; tightening torque: 24Nm. backlash-free coupling and the actuator. Tighten the fixing screws. Note! The brake performance is reduced if the servomotor shaft is pushed in too far into the actuator. Make sure there B is a lash. Measure the distance between the coupling D C and the contact surface, according to the figure to the xx0200000302 right. A: Servomotor B: Fixing screws (4 pcs) C: Toothed wheel ring

D: Backlash-free coupling on the servomotor shaft


A B

79
xx0200000447

51

A: Coupling on actuator shaft B: Coupling on servomotor shaft 79 mm, required distance between coupling and contact surface on actuator. 51 mm, required distance between coupling and contact surface on servomotor.

3.

Reconnect the cables to the servomotor.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

41

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting motor on axes 1, 2 and 3.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace. Recalibrate the robot. Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment. When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

Note/Illustration

2.

Detailed in Installation Manual.

3.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 42 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of servomotor, axis 4

Location

The motor unit of axis 4 is located inside the center tube sleeve, at the lower part of the center unit, as shown in the figure below.

B C

A
xx0200000299

A B C D E

Axis 4 motor unit (located beneath center tube sleeve) Center tube sleeve Spiral cable inspection cover Gimbal Lower platform

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

43

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Lifting bracket String Attach to the cabling to be able to feed it through the center tube while lifting. 3HAC 16640-1 Repair Manual, part 2

Note

Circuit Diagram

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 44 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of the motor unit on axis 4.

Step
1.

Action
Run the actuators so that they are extended to around 500 mm in length. All actuators should have equal length. This is done in order to allow enough space between the center tube sleeve and the center tube. Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively. Switch off the power supply.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the motor unit on axis 4. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removing the actuator!

Step
1.

Action
Cut the straps and disconnect the cabling to axes 4, 5 and 6, at the top of the center tube. Also remove the cable guide for the cabling. Remove the top plate of the center tube. The cabling underneath the lid is still attached! Remove the lid carefully! Note the position of each connector and remove the cable connector holders from the lid. Attach a string to the cabling in order not to drop it into the center tube when lifting.

Note/Illustration

2.

See the figure below!

3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

45

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action
Remove the housing and the lower plate, exercising care with the cables inside the housing. See figure to the right for layout.

Note/Illustration

A B C D

xx0200000306

5. Fit the lifting tool to the center tube, ensuring that the cables can pass through the loop freely and not get caught. Remove the spiral cable cover on the back of center tube sleeve. Remove also the spiral cable inspection cover.

A: Top plate of center tube B: Cable connector holder C: Housing D: Lower plate E: Center tube

6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 46 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
7.

Action
Unscrew the 18 screws that hold the center tube to the axis 4 motor and remove the locating pin, center tube.

Note/Illustration

A B

D
xx0200000363

A: 6 pcs: M8. B: 12 pcs: M6. C: Locating pin, center tube D: Locating pin, center tube sleeve

On reassembly the same locating pin is refitted! 8. Lift the center tube, using a hoist or lift, Shown in the figure above! until the bottom of the center tube almost reaches the gimbal. When lifting the center tube, be very careful not to stretch or squash the cables inside. Eliminate the risk of stretching the cabling by feeding it through at the top at the same rate as the center tube is lifted, with the help of a string. Remove the cable clamp that holds the spiral cable in place.

9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

47

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
10.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the 12 screws that hold the Shown in the figure above! center tube sleeve to the lower platOn reassembly the same locatform interface. ing pin is refitted! Remove the locating pin that positions the center tube sleeve. Lift the center tube sleeve, tilting the wrist slightly for increased accessibility.

11.

A B C

xx0200000307

12. 13. 14. Make a note of the position of the motor unit. Remove the spacer from the axis 4 motor unit. Unscrew the 8 screws that attach the motor unit to the center shaft and remove the motor unit. Check all surfaces to make sure they are free from damage and contamination before proceeding with the assembly routine.

A: center tube sleeve B: Spacer C: Axis 4 motor unit

15.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 48 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of servomotor, axis 4

Location

The motor unit of axis 4 is located inside the center tube sleeve, at the lower part of the center unit, as shown in the figure below.

B C

A
xx0200000299

A B C D E

Axis 4 motor unit (located inside the center tube sleeve) Center tube sleeve Spiral cable inspection cover Gimbal Lower platform

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

49

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Servomotor, axis 4 Lifting bracket Circuit Diagram 3HAC 16640-1 Repair Manual, part 2 3HAC 17153-1

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the motor unit, axis 4.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the axis 4 motor unit to the center 8 pcs: tightening torque: 33 shaft and tighten the screws. Ensure it Nm. has the same orientation as the old one

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 50 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action
Fit and align the spacer to the axis 4 motor unit.

Note/Illustration

A B C

xx0200000307

3. Refit the center tube sleeve, ensuring that the locating pin, center tube sleeve, has the correct orientation. Tighten the 12 screws that hold the sleeve. Refit the cable clamp for the spiral cable. Ensure that the spiral cable runs freely 360in either direction by manually turning the wrist and watching the cable through the inspection hole in the side of the center tube. Align the fixing holes in the axis 4 motor unit to the holes in the center tube sleeve by turning the wrist. Feed the cabling through the center tube (with the help of the string) and lower the center tube carefully in order not to squash the cables.

A: Center tube sleeve B: Spacer C: Axis 4 motor unit

Shown in the figure above! 12 pcs; tightening torque: 17Nm. Make sure to refit the correct locating pin!

4.

5.

6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

51

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
7.

Action
Locate the center tube using the location pin, center tube, as reference and fit the 18 screws.

Note/Illustration

A B

D
xx0200000363

A: 6 pcs: M8; tightening torque: 40 Nm. B: 12 pcs: M6; tightening torque: 17 Nm. C: Locating pin, center tube D: Locating pin, center tube sleeve

Make sure to refit the correct locating pin! 8. Refit the spiral cable inspection cover and the spiral cable cover, including their sealings. Remove the lifting tool from the center tube. Shown in the figure above!

9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 52 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
10.

Action
Refit the lower plate and the housing to the top of the center tube, taking extra care not to squash any cables, or subject them to any undue stress.

Note/Illustration

A B C D

xx0200000306

11. Fit the cable connectors to the top plate, ensuring that the cables are orientated the same way as when they were removed. Fit the top plate to the housing. Refit the cable guide for the axes 4, 5 and 6 cabling and reconnect the cabling previously disconnected.

A: Top plate B: Cable connector holder C: Housing D: Lower plate E: Center tube

12. 13.

Shown in the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

53

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the motor, axis 4.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace. Recalibrate the robot. Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment. When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

Note/Illustration

2.

Detailed in Installation Manual.

3.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 54 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of lower joint

Location

The lower joint is located between the actuator and the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

C D A
xx0200000298

A B C D

Lower joint (beneath the cover) Lower platform Actuator Calibration spacer

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

55

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Hook wrench

Note
3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 56 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of the lower joint.

Step
1.

Action
Run actuators to half way in length. All the actuators should also have an equal length. This is done in order to allow the actuator to retract when the lower joint is unscrewed. Switch off the power supply. In a vertically orientated manipulator the center unit will tend to move away from the corner with the removed lower joint. It is therefor important to anchor the center tube to the surrounding equipment in order to avoid this. For manipulators in other orientations, try to anticipate the movement and secure accordingly.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove a lower joint. The procedure is the same for all actuators. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before separating the parts! Step
1.

Action
Use a heating gun to loosen the thread-locking substance, before removing the lower joint. Loosen the actuator piston from the lower joint with the hook wrenches. The actuator is top heavy and will tend to swing, once disconnected at the bottom. Ensure that the actuator is well anchored.

Note/Illustration

2.

Shown in the figure above! Specified above!

3. 4. 5.

Loosen the lower joint from the lower platform Shown in figure above! using a hook wrench, 3 mm pin. Specified above! Remove the lower joint and the cover. Remove the calibration spacer from the lower joint, in order to refit it onto the new joint!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

57

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of lower joint

Location

The lower joint is located between the actuator and the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

C D A
xx0200000298

A B C D

Lower joint (beneath the cover) Lower platform Actuator Calibration spacer

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 58 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Lower joint Thread-locking substance

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 17154-1

Note
e.g. Loctite 242. Used when securing the lower joint to the lower platform. 3 mm pin

Hook wrench

xx0200000350

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

59

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets.

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the lower joint. The procedure is the same for all actuators.

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the calibration spacer and the cover Spare part no. specified above! to the new lower joint. Fit the lower joint to the actuator, using normal thread-locking fluid. Refit the actuator by screwing the lower joint into the lower platform. Note that, as each turn of the lower joint will alter the length of the actuator by 10 mm, the actuator will be extended around 150 mm as the universal joint is screwed in.

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the lower joint.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace. Recalibrate the robot. Failure to calibrate a robot will seriously affect the performance and can, in the worst-case, cause damage to equipment.

Note/Illustration

2.

Detailed in Installation Manual.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 60 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action
When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

Note/Illustration

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

61

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of wrist

Location

The wrist is located on the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

E C

F A
xx0200000300

A B C D E F

Wrist Center tube Spiral cable inspection cover Gimbal Center tube sleeve Lower platform

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 62 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Lifting bracket Punch tool Lifting jack Used for the crossed roller bearing. Stroke of at least 100 mm.

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

The wrist weighs 36 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

63

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of the wrist unit.

Step
1.

Action
Run the actuators so that they are extended to around 500 mm in length. All the actuators should have equal length. This is done in order to allow enough space between the centre tube sleeve and the centre tube. Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively. Switch off the power supply.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 64 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the wrist. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removing the wrist!

Step
1.

Action
Remove the 6 attachment screws that hold the axis 4 motor unit to the centre tube.

Note/Illustration

A B

D
xx0200000363

A: Attachment screws, axis 4 motor to centre tube: 6 pcs, M8 x 60. B: Attachment screws C: Locating pin, centre tube D: Locating pin, centre tube sleeve

2.

Remove the spiral cable cover on the Shown in the figure above! back of centre tube sleeve and the spiral cable inspection cover on the same sleeve. Remove the cable clamp that holds the spiral cable in place.

3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

65

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
4.

Action

Note/Illustration

Unscrew 10 of the 12 screws in the Shown in the figure above! wrist flange that hold the wrist to the lower platform. Turn the wrist to access all the screws. Leave one screw at the front and one at the rear of the wrist, but ensure that they are both accessible for removal without having to turn the wrist. Position the lifting jack underneath the wrist housing, in its extended position, so that it can lower the wrist at least 100 mm without being repositioned. Remove the final two screws. Lower the wrist gently until the screws that attach the centre shaft to the wrist are accessible. If the wrist appears to be stuck, it needs to be pressed out. Use two of the fixing holes for the wrist/lower platform joint, that are threaded M8 and lie 180in relation to each other. Note! Turn the wrist so that these holes are not aligned with the M6 holes in the lower platform, as this will damage the threads and hamper assembly at a later stage. If possible, insert a metal shim to protect the surface of the lower platform flange. Insert two M8 bolts, with at least 40 mm of thread, into the holes, and pull the wrist off the lower platform. Remove the screws and lower the wrist while disconnecting the cabling. Note! When removing the wrist: make sure it is lowered carefully, following the same orientation when mounted. If tilted, the interface of the wrist and the lower platform may be damaged!

5.

6. 7.

xx0200000364

8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 66 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of wrist

Location

The wrist is located on the lower platform, as shown in the figure below.

E C

F A
xx0200000300

A B C D E F

Wrist Center tube Spiral cable inspection cover Gimbal Center tube sleeve Lower platform

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

67

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Wrist Punch tool

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 17155-1

Note
Used for the crossed roller bearing. Stroke of at least 100 mm.

Lifting jack

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets. The wrist weighs 36 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 68 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the wrist.

Step
1.

Action
Replace the o-ring on the centre shaft with the new one that is included in the spare parts kit. Ensure that the o-ring is lubricated prior to fitment.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000367

2.

Ensure that the jack is correctly positioned underneath the lower platform, and that it is in its lowest position. Place the wrist on the jack. Reconnect the cabling. Elevate the wrist with the jack and guide it so that it fits onto the centre shaft. Ensure that the cabling is guided into the correct position and does not get jammed. Note! Make sure the wrist is elevated in the same direction that the centre tube is pointing, so that the interfaces are not damaged! Attach the centre shaft to the wrist using the 12 screws. 12 pcs; tightening torque: 17 Nm.

3. 4.

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

69

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
6.

Action

Note/Illustration

Lift the wrist with the jack until it is possi- 12 pcs; tightening torque: 10 ble to fasten the attachment screws Nm. through the wrist flange into the lower Shown in the figure above! platform. Press the wrist to its topmost position by tightening two of the attachment screws, 180in relation to each other. Check that the bearing runs smoothly by turning the wrist manually. Refit the spiral cable clamp and ensure that the spiral cable twists freely throughout the 360of the axis 4 rotation. It must not catch or have any tendency to rub or over-tighten, as this will drastically shorten the life of the cable. Align the holes in the centre tube sleeve with the holes in the axis 4 motor unit by turning the wrist. Fit the six M8 screws. Tighten them as detailed to the right. Shown in the figure above!

7.

8.

9. 10.

6 pcs: M8; tightening torque: 40 Nm.

Refit the spiral cable cover and the spiral Shown in the figure above! cable inspection cover with their sealings.

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace. Recalibrate the robot. Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment.

Note/Illustration

2.

Detailed in Installation Manual.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 70 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action
When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

Note/Illustration

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

71

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of center unit

Location

The center unit includes the center tube, wrist, spiral cable, linear guide and axis 4 motor unit. It is located in the center of the manipulator, as shown in the figure below. When removed, the housing and the gimble is left mounted on the center unit, as shown in the figure below.
C I

H G

E A F
xx0200000301

A B C D E

Center unit Wrist unit Center tube Axis 4 motor unit (inside center tube sleeve) Lower platform

F G H I

Lower joint Upper platform Gimbal Linear guide

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 72 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Hook wrench

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
3 mm pin

xx0200000350

Hook wrench with 3 mm pin

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit weighs over 100 kg! All lifting equipment must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

73

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of the center unit.

Step
1.

Action
Run the actuators so that they are extended to around 300 mm in length. All the actuators should have equal length. This is done in order to allow enough space for the center unit to be removed. Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0respectively. Switch off the power supply.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the center unit. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removal!

Step
1.

Action
Disconnect the cabling running into the center unit, at the top of the center unit.

Note/Illustration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 74 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action
Secure the center unit with a strap attached to a hoist or lift. Fasten the strap around the body of the center tube just below the upper housing so that it hangs well balanced, in such a way that the center unit will be easy to handle. Note! The center unit weighs over 100 kg and must be secured properly when the gimbal and actuator joints are disconnected as the unit will tend to move suddenly as it is top heavy.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000365

3.

Use a heating gun at the lower joint, to loosen the thread-locking substance before removing the joint. Remove the actuators from the Shown in the figure above! lower platform by disconnect- Specified above! ing the lower joints from the lower platform using the hook wrench. Note! The actuators are top heavy and will turn when released from the lower platform. Ensure that they are fastened before releasing them after removal.

4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

75

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
5.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the center unit from Shown in the figure above! the upper platform by removing the 4 attachment screws, located as shown in the figure to the right. Note! The gimbal weighs approximately 20 kg, be careful A when removing the attachment screws!

xx0200000309

A: Attachment screws that hold the gimbal to the upper platform (4 pcs)

6.

Lower the gimbal to the bottom Shown in the figure above! of the run of the linear guides so that it rests securely. Secure it to the center unit so that it does not turn or move suddenly when the center unit is released. Lower the center unit with the hoist.

7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 76 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of center unit

Location

The center unit includes the center tube, wrist and axis 4 motor unit. It is located in the center of the manipulator, as shown in the figure below. When removed, the housing and the gimble is left mounted on the center unit, as shown in the figure below.

C I

H G

E A F
xx0200000301

A B C D E

Center unit Wrist Center tube Axis 4 motor unit (inside center tube sleeve) Lower platform

F G H I

Lower joint Upper platform Gimbal Linear guide

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

77

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Center Unit Thread-locking substance

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 17156-1

Note
e.g. Loctite 242. Used when securing the lower joint to the lower platform. 3 mm pin

Hook wrench

xx0200000350

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 78 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets. The center unit weighs over 100 kg! All lifting equipment must be dimensioned accordingly!

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the center unit.

Step
1. 2.

Action
Lift the center unit in position with the hoist.

Note/Illustration

Insert the four screws that Shown in the figure above! hold the gimbal to the upper platform, but do not tighten them. Just screw them in to the point where it is still possible to move the gimbal in relation to the upper platform.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

79

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
3.

Action
Push the gimbal to the left (as seen when facing the front of the robot) so that the surfaces of the master lie flush, as shown in the figure to the right.

Note/Illustration
A B C

xx0200000310

4. 5. Tighten the 4 screws.

A: center unit B: Gimbal C: Upper platform D: Master E: Direction for pushing the gimbal

4 pcs; tightening torque: 40 Nm.

Refit the actuators by Shown in the figure above! screwing the lower joint of each actuator to the lower platform, with the hook wrench and using normal thread-locking fluid. Note that, as each turn of the lower joint will alter the length of the actuator by 10 mm, the actuator will be extended around 150 mm as the universal joint is screwed in.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 80 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the center unit.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace.

Note/Illustration

2.

Recalibrate the robot. Detailed in Installation Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect Manual. the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment. When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

3.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

81

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Removal of spiral cable

Location

The spiral cable is located inside the center tube, running from the top of the manipulator to the wrist unit.

C A
xx0200000312

A B C

Spiral cable Spiral cable inspection cover Wrist unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 82 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Safety

Please read the following notations before the removal.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before removing, clean the work area and the components to be removed. - Place the removed components in a clean container.

The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

83

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Preparatory work

Follow the instructions below for preparatory work, before commencing the removal of the spiral cable.

Step
1.

Action
Run the actuators so that they are extended to around 500 mm in length. All the actuators should have equal length. This is done in order to allow enough space for the center tube to be removed. Position axes 4, 5 and 6 at 0 respectively. Switch off the power supply.

Note/Illustration

2. 3.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the spiral cable. Make sure the preparatory work above is done before removal!

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Remove the axis 4 motor unit. Remove the wrist unit. Remove the cable clamp that holds the spiral cable to the center shaft and remove the spiral cable.

Note/Illustration
Detailed in Removal of servomotor, axis 4. Detailed in Removal of wrist unit.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 84 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting of spiral cable

Location

The spiral cable is located inside the center tube, running from the top of the manipulator down to the wrist unit.

C A
xx0200000312

A B C

Spiral cable Spiral cable inspection cover Wrist unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

85

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Spiral Cable Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 17157-1

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Safety

Please read the following notations before refitting.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. Please observe the following when refitting components: - Carefully clean the mating surfaces. - Ensure that there are no damaged surfaces or other parts that need rectifying or replacing. - Replace all gaskets. The center unit is very heavy and in a vertically orientated robot, there is a risk of pinching between the center tube and the axis 4 motor.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 86 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the spiral cable.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the new spiral cable and refit Spare part no. specified above! the cable clamp that holds the spiral cable to the centre shaft. Make sure that the spiral cable is properly attached so that it can not run up and down on the shaft. Press down the spiral cable so that the first bend is tightly secured against the upper surface of the shaft as shown in the figure to the right!

xx0200000366

2. 3.

Refit the wrist unit. Refit the axis 4 motor unit.

Detailed in Refitting of wrist unit. Detailed in Refitting of servomotor, axis 4.

Commissioning

Follow the instructions below before commissioning after refitting the spiral cable and wrist unit.

Step
1.

Action
Check the manipulator and its surrounding equipment to ensure that all screws, nuts and bolts are tightened and that no foreign objects remain within the workspace.

Note/Illustration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

87

Manipulator
Manipulator repairs

Step
2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Recalibrate the robot. Detailed in Installation Failure to calibrate the robot will seriously affect Manual. the performance and can, in the worst case, cause damage to equipment. When the spare part replacements have been completed, ensure that the machine data folder is updated, specifying all details such as what has been replaced and when, part serial numbers and other related component data.

3.

When performing the first test run after a service activity (repair, installation or maintenance), it is vital that: - all normal safety equipment is installed properly, e.g. TPU enabling device. - all personnel is standing at a safe distance from the manipulator, i.e. out of its reach behind any safety fences, etc. - special attention is paid to the function of the part previously serviced.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 88 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Section B: Distribution box repairs Replacement of battery, distribution box

Location

The battery is located in the distribution box as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000394

A B

Serial measurement card Battery

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

89

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Battery 4944026-4

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller or units connected to the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the battery from the distribution box.

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Note the position of the battery and cable ties. Remove the battery connector connecting the battery to the serial measurement circuit board. Cut the two cable ties and remove the battery. The battery must be disposed of through the appropriate recycling channels.

Note/Illustration
Shown in the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 90 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the battery to the distribution box.

Step
1.

Action
Place the new battery on top of the serial measurement card cover. Use cable ties to fix the battery. Connect the electrical connector.

Note/Illustration
Part no. specified above! Shown in the figure above!

2. 3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

91

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Replacement of serial measurement card, distribution box

Location

The serial measurement card is located in the distribution box as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000394

A B

Serial measurement card Battery

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 92 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Serial Measurement card

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 14505-1

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller or units connected to the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the serial measurement card from the distribution box.

Step
1. 2. 3. 4.

Action
Remove the four electrical connectors attached to the serial measurement card. Remove the three screws holding the card and the battery to the enclosure. Remove the serial measurement card together with the battery. Remove the battery from the card.

Note/Illustration

Shown in the figure above! The battery is refitted on to the new card.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

93

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the serial measurement card to the distribution box.

Step
1.

Action
Fit the battery to the new serial measurement card.

Note/Illustration
Part no. specified above! Shown in the figure above!

2. 3. 4.

Carefully fit the card and the battery in place. Refit the three screws holding the serial measurement card and the battery to the enclosure. Refit the four electrical connectors.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 94 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Replacement of brake release card, distribution box

Location

The brake release card is located in the distribution box as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000393

A B

Brake release card Brake release buttons

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

95

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Brake Release card

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 0017-1

Note

Safety

Please read the following notations before the replacement.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller or units connected to the controller: Turn off all electric power supply to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet or inside any external units are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the brake release card from the distribution box.

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Remove the three electrical connectors attached to the brake release card. Remove the four screws holding the card to the enclosure. Remove the brake release card.

Note/Illustration

Shown in the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 96 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the brake release card to the distribution box.

Step
1.

Action
Carefully fit the new brake release card in place. Refit the four screws holding the brake release card to the enclosure. Replace the three electrical connectors. Note! It is very important that all screening is reconnected correctly in order to achieve maximum performance from the equipment.

Note/Illustration
Part no. specified above! Shown in the figure above!

2. 3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

97

Manipulator
Distribution box repairs

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 98 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Chapter 4:Controller
Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all repair activities recommended for the controller. It is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific repair activity, e.g. Removal or Refitting of a certain component in the controller. Each unit contains all information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials. The chapter is divided into:
Removal instructions for all components Refitting instructions for all components Remaining instructions

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

99

Controller repair

Putting the computer unit in the service position

Location of computer unit

The computer unit is located as shown in the figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Computer unit

Opening

The procedure below details how to open the computer unit.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Motors and gears are HOT after running the robot! Burns may result from touching the motors or gears! - Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse as parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing motor, axis 2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 100 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
1.

Action
Make sure the ESD-wrist band is worn and connected to ground. Disconnect all connectors/ cables and make sure they do not obstruct pulling the computer unit out. Unscrew the transport locks in both corners of the computer unit. This is done by turning the screw two turns (see position 1 in the figure) and pushing the lock washers towards the screw (see position 2). Lift the two handles and push them together to release the computer unit (see position 1 in the figure).

Note/Illustration

2.

3.

xx0200000016

4.

xx0200000017

5.

Push the locking device on See the figure above! the front of the computer unit to the right (see position 2 in the figure).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

101

Controller repair

Step
6.

Action
Pull the computer unit out of the cabinet until it locks in its end position. Then swing it to the left as shown in the figure.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000018

7.

If work is to be performed on the computer unit while in the service position, it must be locked in this position. This is done by placing the puck (located on the lower left side) on the metal bar. Alternatively, the computer unit may be lifted straight up and placed on a work bench.

Closing

The procedure below details how to close the computer unit.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Motors and gears are HOT after running the robot! Burns may result from touching the motors or gears! - Turn off all electric power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse as parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing motor, axis 2.

Step
1.

Action
Swing the computer unit back into position and secure it.

Note/Illustration
See the figure above! Also see the procedure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 102 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Replacement of air filter, controller

Location of air filter

The air filter is located in the air filter magazine in the front hatch.

A
xx0200000284

Air filter magazine

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Air filter Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAB 8028-1

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

103

Controller repair

Removal, air filter

The procedure below details how to remove the air filter.

Step
1.

Action
Open the bottom of the air filter magazine as shown in the figure.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000001

2. 3.

Unlock the lower springs. Lower the magazine and remove. Remove the old filter by releasing the lock shackle and lifting it. Note! In cases of less contamination, the air filter may be cleaned and refitted. The procedure for this is detailed in section "Cleaning the air filter, controller" in the Maintenance Manual.

xx0200000003

Refitting, air filter

The procedure below details how to refit the air filter.

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the air filter in the magazine. Art. no. is specified above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 104 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action
Fit the spring at the top of the air filter magazine into the cabinet door and push upwards inwards. Push until the lower springs snap into the cabinet door.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000006

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

105

Controller repair

Replacement of battery unit, controller

Location of battery unit

The battery unit is located at the bottom of the controller.

A
xx0200000103

Battery unit

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Battery unit

Spare part no. Art no.


3HAC 5393-2

Note
To be replaced as a complete unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 106 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Equipment, etc.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art no.

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal, battery unit

The procedure below details how to remove the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Remove the battery unit by unscrewing its attachment screws (1).

Note/Illustration

X1

X1

X1

X1

X2

X2

X2

X2

X3

xx0200000004

2.

Pull the battery unit out.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

107

Controller repair

Step
3.

Action
Disconnect the three cables from the battery unit.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000005

Refitting, battery unit

The procedure below details how to refit the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Place the battery unit close to its position. Reconnect the cables and push the unit into position. Secure it with the attachment screws.

Note/Illustration
Art. no. specified above! See illustration above! See illustration above! See illustration above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 108 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Replacement of I/O and gateway units

Location of I/O and gateway units

The I/O and gateway units are located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000009

A B

I/O and gateway units located beneath the top cover of the cabinet Four available slots for I/O and gateway units

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

109

Controller repair

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Digital 24 VDC I/O Analog I/O AD Combi I/O Digital 120 VAC I/O Digital I/O with relays Gateway for Allen-Bradley, RIO Gateway for Interbus-S Gateway for Profibus DP, slave unit

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAB 7229-1 3HAB 7230-1 3HAB 7231-1 3HAB 9669-1

Note
DSQC 328 DSQC 327 DSQC 320 DSQC 332

3HNE 00554-1 DSQC 355

3HNE00025-1 DSQC 350 3HNE00006-1 DSQC 351 3HNE00009-1 DSQC 352

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove an I/O or gateway board.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Disconnect any connec- The actual number of connectors vary tors from the unit. Note depending on type of unit. which connector goes where, to facilitate reassembly.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 110 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action
Lift the unit until the upper claw, that holds the unit to the rail, is released. Use: a screwdriver when replacing I/O units (position 2a in the figure). by hand when replacing a gateway unit (position 2b in the figure).

Note/Illustration

2a

3a

2b

3b

xx0200000010

3.

With the upper claw released, tip the unit away from the mounting rail and remove it (positions 3a and 3b in the figure).

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit an I/O or gateway board.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Hook the unit back onto the mounting rail and snap it gently in position.

Note/Illustration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

111

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action
Reconnect all connectors disconnected during removal.

Note/Illustration

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 112 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Replacement of bleeder resistor

Location of bleeder resistor

The bleeder resistor is located behind the drive units, as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

A B C D E

Drive units Bleeder resistor unit System fan unit Rectifier (drive unit) Power supply unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

113

Controller repair

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Bleeder resistor

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 4560-5

Note

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the bleeder resistor.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Swing the power supply Detailed in section "Replacement of power unit out of the way. supply unit". Remove the drive units. Detailed in section "Replacement of drive units and rectifier". Disconnect the cable secured on top of the bleeder resistor unit (see position 1 in the figure).

1 2

xx0200000015

4.

Remove the bleeder resistor unit from the enclosure (see position 2 in the figure).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 114 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the bleeder resistor.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Fit the bleeder resistor into position and secure it with the spring. Secure the cable disconnected during disassembly. Refit the drive unit.

Note/Illustration
Art. no. specified above! Also see the figure above!

2. 3.

Detailed in section "Replacement of drive units and rectifier". Detailed in section "Replacement of power supply unit".

4.

Swing the power supply unit back into position.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

115

Controller repair

Replacement of mass storage memory

Location of mass storage memory

The mass storage memory is located in the computer system, which is shown in the figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Computer system

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no. Note
Mass storage memory, 3HAC 7519-2 64 MB Mass storage memory, 3HAC 7519-3 128 MB

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 116 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Equipment, etc.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the mass storage memory.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action
Put the computer unit in the service position. Remove the cover from the right side of the computer system by unscrewing the ten M5 screws (item 1 in the figure).

Note/Illustration
Detailed in section "Putting the computer in the service position".
1

xx0200000019

3.

Disconnect the connectors X1 and X2 from the front of the mass storage memory (item 2 in the figure).

See figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

117

Controller repair

Step
4.

Action

Note/Illustration

Remove the mass storage See figure above! memory by unscrewing its M4 attachment screws as shown in the figure (items 3 and 4 in the figure).

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the mass storage memory.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the mass storage mem- Art. no. is specified above! ory in position and secure it 1 with its M4 attachment screws (items 3 and 4 in the figure)
3

xx0200000019

2.

Reconnect connectors X1 See the figure above! and X2 to the front of the computer unit (item 2 in the figure).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 118 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
3.

Action

Note/Illustration

Refit the cover on the right See the figure above! side of the computer unit and secure it with its ten M5 attachment screws (item 1 in the figure). Put the computer system Detailed in section "Putting the computer in back in its regular operation the service position". position.

4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

119

Controller repair

Replacement of internal cooling fan

Location of internal cooling fan

The internal cooling fan is located in the computer system, which is shown in the figure below.

A
xx0200000105

Computer system

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Internal cooling fan Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 6655-1

Note
Two fans required These procedures include references to the tools required.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 120 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the internal cooling fan.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Put the computer unit in the service position.

Note/Illustration
Detailed in "Putting the computer in the service position".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

121

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action
Disconnect the connector E5 or E6 respectively, depending on which fan is to be replaced.

Note/Illustration

E
xx0200000020

3. Remove the internal cooling fan inwards by gently pressing the locking tabs upwards.

A: Upper fan B: Lower fan C: Locking tabs D: Connector E5 E: Connector E6

See the figure above!

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the internal cooling fan.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 122 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Tip the internal cooling fan with its top towards Art. no. specified above! the cabinet wall and fit it into the hole (see the figure).

xx0200000021

2. With the wall between the upper lock spring hooks, push the fan unit upward and inward until the locking tab snaps to the wall.

A: Push direction

See the figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

123

Controller repair

Step
3. 4.

Action
Reconnect the connector E5 or E6 respectively, depending on which fan was replaced. Put the computer unit back in the regular operation position.

Note/Illustration

Detailed in "Putting the computer in the service position".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 124 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Replacement of drive units and rectifier

Location of drive units and rectifier

The drive units and rectifier are located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

A B C D E

Drive units Bleeder resistor unit System fan unit Rectifier (drive unit) Power supply unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

125

Controller repair

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Drive unit (rectifier) Drive unit, axes 1-6 Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAB 8101-17 3HAB 8101-18

Note
DSQC 545A DSQC 546A These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the drive units.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Swing the power supply unit out of the way.

Note/Illustration
Detailed in section "Replacement of power supply unit"

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 126 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
2.

Action
Disconnect connectors X1 and X2, four connectors each (see position 1 in the figure).

Note/Illustration

xx0200000013

3.

Remove the power supply See figure above! bar in front of the drive units (see position 2 in the figure). Lift the spring to release the drive unit and pull it slightly outwards (see position 3 in the figure).

4.

xx0200000014

5.

Tip it out and remove it (see position 4 in the figure).

See figure above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

127

Controller repair

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the drive units.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2. 3. 4.

Action
Fit the unit into position and secure it with the spring. Refit the power bar in front of the unit. Reconnect all connectors X1 and X2.

Note/Illustration
Also see figure above!

Swing the power supply unit back into position. Detailed in section "Replacement of power supply unit"

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 128 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Replacement of system fan unit

Location of system fan unit

The system fan unit is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000007

A B C D E

Drive units Bleeder resistor unit System fan unit Rectifier (drive unit) Power supply unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

129

Controller repair

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


System fan unit Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 12924-2

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action
Remove the bleeder resistor unit. Disconnect the cable (see position 1 in the figure).

Note/Illustration
Detailed in "Replacement of bleeder resistor" in the Repair Manual.

xx0200000008

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 130 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Step
3.

Action
Pull the back of the system fan unit upwards to free it and then tip it out of the enclosure (see position 2 in the figure).

Note/Illustration

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the system fan unit into position and Art. no. specified above! secure it (see position 2 in the figure above). Reconnect the cable disconnected during disassembly (see position 1 in the figure above). Refit the bleeder resistor unit. Detailed in section "Replacement of bleeder resistor" in the Repair Manual.

3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

131

Controller repair

Replacement of power supply unit

Location of power supply unit

The power supply unit is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000011

A B

Power supply unit locking spring (view from front) Power supply unit folded out from the cabinet (view from above)

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Power supply unit Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAB 4297-1

Note
DSQC 506 These procedures include references to the tools required.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 132 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Controller repair

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the power supply unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Push the power supply Shown in figure above! unit locking spring down to release the power supply unit. Swing the unit out of the cabinet. Remove the cable straps on top of the power supply unit (see position 1 in the figure). Shown in figure above

2. 3.

xx0200000012

4.

Disconnect the cables at the back of the unit (see position 2 in the figure). Remove the screw (see position 3 in the figure).

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

133

Controller repair

Step
6.

Action
Lift the unit straight up to release it from the hooks and remove it outwards (see position 4 in the figure).

Note/Illustration

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the power supply unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action
Fit the power supply unit into position onto its hooks and secure it with the attachment screws (see position 3 and 4 in figure in the section Removal). Reconnect all connectors disconnected during removal (see position 2 in figure). Secure the cables on top of the unit with new cable straps (see position 1 in figure). Swing the unit back into the cabinet and secure it with the locking spring.

Note/Illustration
Art. no. specified above!

2. 3. 4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 134 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept

Chapter 5:Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept


Introduction
Definitions

This chapter contains all the circuit diagrams for the IRB 940 Tricept.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete

135

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/2, Potentials from control

contact R1 SMB

+EC1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

en0200000410

contact R1 MP

+EC1

=M1/2, Potentials from control


136

+EC1
D6 9.5 Serial measuring board R2.SMB1-4 A3 A4 D8 A5 A6 PE D10 PE PE C3 PE C1

4.0

-R1MP
AWG16 yel/gr

A1

A2

-SMB

4.3 PE1

-XP1-4

14

15

18

-XTPE
PE PE PE PE

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr AWG20 blue

AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM1 CE

A C D E G H

-XR1

CE

WM1

10

WR1

+M1
C D E G F H J K L M CE

Motor axis 1

-XM1.1

-XR1.1

-B1 -RT1 -Y1


-

M 3 PE

Resolver 1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/3, Axis 1

en0200000411

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/3, Axis 1

137

+EC1
A9 A10 A11 A12 9.5 Serial measuring board C5 C4

3.0

-R1MP

A7

A8

-SMB

R2.SMB1-4

3.4

5.3

PE1 -XTPE
PE PE

PE1

-XP1-4

16

17

19

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr AWG20 blue

AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM2
C D E F G J K L M H CE

-XR2

CE

WM2

10

WR2

+M2
C D E F G H J K L M CE

Motor axis 2

-XM2.1

-XR2.1

-B2 -RT2 -Y2


Resolver 2

M
PE

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/4, Axis 2

en0200000412

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/4, Axis 2

138

+EC1
B2 9.5 Serial measuring board R2.SMB1-4 C15 C7 C6

3.0

-R1MP

A13 A14 C13 A15 A16 C14 B1

-SMB

4.3

6.3

PE1 -XTPE
PE PE

PE1

-XP1-4
9

21

10

22

20

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr AWG20 blue

AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM3
CE

-XR3

CE

WM3

10

WR3

+M3
C D E F G H J K L M CE

Motor axis 3

-XM3.1

-XR3.1

-B3 -RT3 -Y3


Resolver 3

PE

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/5, Axis 3

en0200000414

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/5, Axis 3

139

+EC1
B4 D12 D13 C9 C8 9.5 Serial measuring board R2.SMB3-6 B5

3.0

-R1MP

B3

D11

-SMB

5.3

7.3

PE1 -XTPE
PE

PE1

-XP3-6
2

14

15

18

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr

AWG20 blue

AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM4
C E G J K L M CE

-XR4

CE

WM4

10

WR4

-XM4.1
L

A E G J K

M CE

-XR4.1

Wmotor4

-XMTR4
2 3 4 8

Wmotor4.1

-XMTR4
Wmotor4.1

12

13

15

14

11

10

+M4
W + PE

Motor axis 4

-B4 -RT4 -Y4


Resolver 4 -

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/6, Axis 4

en0200000415

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/6, Axis 4

140

+EC1
B6 C11 C10 9.5 Serial measuring board R2.SMB3-6 D14 B8 D9

3.0

-R1MP

B7

D15

-SMB

6.3

8.3

PE1 -XTPE
PE

PE1

-XP3-6

16

17

19

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr

AWG20 blue

AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM5
C G K CE L J M E

-XR5

CE

WM5

10

WR5

-XM5.1
C G K L J E

M CE

-XR5.1

Wmotor_5-6 Spiral 28x 2 12


10

-XMTR5-6
3 11

18 Wmotor6_and_brake 5

Wmotor5 18x

-XMTR5-6 -X5
1 2 Wbrake5

21

22

24

23

20

19

25

Wmotor5

+M5
+

Motor axis 5

-B5 -RT5 -Y5


Resolver 5 -

PE

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/7, Axis 5

en0200000416

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/7, Axis 5

141

+EC1
B10 9.5 Serial measuring board R2.SMB3-6 B11 C2 C12

3.0

-R1MP

B9

-SMB

7.3

9.1

PE1 -XTPE
PE

PE1

-XP3-6
9

21

10

22

20

AWG16 grey

AWG16 yel/gr

AWG20 blue AWG20 blue

AWG22 blue

-XM6
C CE E G J K L M

-XR6

CE

WM6

10

WR6

-XM6.1
C E G J K L

M CE

-XR6.1

Wmotor_5-6

-XMTR5-6
6 7 16 14

15

27

36

30

31

33

32

29

28

34

motor6_and_brake 5

+M6
W + PE

Motor axis 6

-B6 -RT6 -Y6


Resolver 6

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/8, Axis 6

en0200000417

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/8, Axis 6

142

EC1
D3 D2 D4

3.0

R1MP D1
B C D E F

R1SMB A

M CE

AWG20 blue

WSMB canbus 8x

-G
7,2VDC/4Ah Battery blue black

8.3/ PE PE PE

PE1

-XTPE -SMB
3.6 Serial measuring board

AWG10 yel/gr

R2SMB

CE

R2G 2

earth conn. (screw) distribution box chassie

earth conn. (screw) cover

earth conn. (screw) mounting plate

earth conn. (screw) distribution box outside

AWG10 5m yel/gr

=M1 +FO

earth conn. (screw) manip. foot

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete =M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connections

en0200000418

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/9, Serial Measure board, Earth connec-

143

Circuit Diagram, IRB 940 Tricept - =M1/10 Brake release unit

B16 B12 B13

AWG16 blue

B14 B15

-R1MP

AWG16 blue

-X8

Brake release unit

-BU

-X9

10

11

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

en0200000419

+EC1

3.0

=M1/10 Brake release unit


144

-X10

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus

Chapter 6:Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus


Introduction
Definitions

This chapter contains the circuit diagram for the controller S4Cplus. The chapter is divided into the separate systems..

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16640-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete

145

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-1.

System 1: General information

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 1-1. Block Diagram

146

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 1-2. View of Control Cabinet

147

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 1-3. View of Control Cabinet

148

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 1-4. Designation

149

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 1-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 1-5. Designation

150

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-1.

System 2: Mains Connection and Power Supply

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-1. Mains Connection

151

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-2. Transformer Unit

152

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-3. Power Supply

153

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-4. Power Supply

154

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-5. External transformer unit 200-500V IRB6600/7600

155

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 2-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 2-6. Transformer unit 400-475V IRB 6600/7600

156

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-1.

System 3: Computer Unit and Connector Unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-1. Block Diagram/Computer Unit

157

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-2. Cabling in Computer Unit

158

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-3. Main Computer and Hard Disk / Flash Disk Drive

159

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-4. Compute Cooling

160

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-5. Base Connector Board and I/O Computer

161

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-6. Connector Board and I/O Computer

162

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-7. Connector Board and Axis Computer

163

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-8. Base Connector Unit

164

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 3-9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 3-9. Connector Plate on Controller Panel

165

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-1.

System 4: Emergency Stops and Run Chain

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 4-1. Emergency Stop

166

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 4-2. Run Chain

167

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 4-3. Run Chain

168

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 4-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 4-4. Power Unit Servo Disconnector

169

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-1.

System 5: Drive System and Robot Cable

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-1. Block Diagram

170

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-2. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder

171

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-3. Drive System Signal Connection 2 Drive Units

172

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-4. Drive System Signal Connection 3 Drive Units

173

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-5. Servo Drive Units / IRB 140

174

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-6. Servo Drive Units / IRB 340

175

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-7. Servo Drive Units / IRB 640, 840

176

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-8. Servo Drive Units / IRB 1400, 2400

177

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-9. Servo Drive Units / IRB 4400, 6400S/PE

178

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-10.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-10. Servo Drive Units / IRB 6400R

179

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-11.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-11. Control Cable IRB 140

180

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-12.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-12. Control Cable IRB 340, 1400 and 2400

181

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-13.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-13. Control Cable IRB 640, 840, 4400 and 6400S/PE

182

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-14.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-14. Control Cable IRB 6400R

183

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-15.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-15. Rectifier, fans and bleeder

184

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-16.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-16. Servo Drive System

185

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 5-17.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 5-17. Control cable

186

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-1.

System 6: External axes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-1. External axes

187

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-2. Axes Computer 2 and Connector Board

188

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-3. Expansion Board Axis Connector Board

189

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-4. Drive System Signal Connection External Axes

190

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-5. External axes no. 7th - 9th Control Signal Connection

191

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-6. Axis Computer 2 and Axis Connector Unit if External Axis Cabinet

192

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-7. Connection to External Axis Cabinet

193

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 6-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 6-8. Servogun-SMB power/signals cable

194

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-1.

System 7: I/O Units and Field Bus Modules

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-1. I/O Unit Position

195

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-2. Digital Part of Combi I/O and Digital I/O Unit Input Part

196

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-3. Digital I/O Unit Output Part

197

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-4. Combi I/O Unit Digital and Analogue Output Part

198

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-5. Digital Input Part of 120V AC I/O Unit

199

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-6. Digital Output Part of 120V AC I/O Unit

200

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-7. Relay I/O Unit Input 1-16

201

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-8. Digital with Relays I/O Output 1-8

202

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-9. Digital with Relays I/O Output 9-16

203

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-10.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-10. Analogue I/O Unit

204

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-11.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-11. Remote I/O Unit For Allen Bradley PLC

205

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-12.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-12. Interbus-S Master/Slave - Interbus-S Master

206

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-13.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-13. Profibus DP SLave

207

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-14.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-14. Encoder Unit

208

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-15.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-15. Profibus DP Master/Slave

209

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 7-16.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 7-16. Interbus master/slave optical fibre and copper wire

210

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-1.

System 8: Other options

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-1. Floppy Disk

211

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-2. Service Equipment Supply

212

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-3. External Connections System Signals

213

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-4. Position Switches on Manipulator

214

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-5. Customer Signals

215

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-6. Sustomer Power/SIgnal IRB 2400, 4400, 6400S/PE

216

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-7. Customer Cable Power/Signal/CAN IRB 6400R

217

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-8. External Control Panel

218

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-9. Extension Cable Teach Pendant

219

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-10.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-10. Time Relay

220

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-11.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-11. Customer Precess / Power / Signal / Profibus DP M/S

221

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-12.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-12. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R

222

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-13.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-13. LAN Ethernet connection

223

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-14.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-14. Customer power/CAN-BUS IRB 640/6400S

224

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-15.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-15. Customer cable power/signal CAN-BUS IRB 6600/7600

225

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-16.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-16. Customer cable power/signal Profibus IRB 6600/7600

226

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 8-17.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 8-17. Optional customer power/signal Profibus IRB 6400R

227

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-1.

System 9: External Axis Cabinet

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-1. Block Diagram

228

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-2.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-2. View of External Axis Cabinet

229

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-3. Designation

230

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-4. Mains Connection

231

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-5. Transformer Unit

232

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-6. Power Supply, I/O Supply

233

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-7. Power Unit

234

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-8.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-8. Rectifier, Fans and Bleeder

235

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-9.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-9. Drive Unit Signal Connection 1 External Drive Unit

236

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-10.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-10. Drive Unit Signal Connection 2 External Drive Units

237

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-11.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-11. Drive Unit Signal Connection 3 External Drive Units

238

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-12.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-12. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT

239

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-13.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-13. Drive Unit and Control Cable Drive Unit GT+CCB

240

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-14.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-14. Drive Unit and Control Cable

241

Circuit Diagram, S4Cplus - Sheet 9-15.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to -your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Sheet 9-15. Service Equipment Supply

242

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

243

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 244 3HAC 16640-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance Manual
Industrial Robot IRB 940 Tricept
3HAC 16639-1 / M2000 / Rev. IRB 940 Tricept

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics S-721 68 VSTERS SWEDEN Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000 Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance Manual, IRB 940 Tricept


3HAC 16639-1
-

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this manual and products described herein. This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABBs written permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted. Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

Copyright 2002 ABB All rights reserved. ABB Automation Technology Products AB Robotics SE-721 68 Vsters Sweden

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Overview Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept Chapter 1: Safety, service Introduction Safety, service - General
Section A: References

1 3 5 5 6
7

Limitation of Liability Applicable Safety Standards Related information


Section B: Safety risks

7 7 8
9

Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts
Section C: Safety actions

9 9 9 10 10 11
13

Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulator's arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit Work inside the manipulators working range Chapter 2: Reference Information Introduction Screw joints Weight specifications Chapter 3: Maintenance activities, manipulator Introduction
Section A: Maintenance intervals

13 13 14 14 15 15 15 17 17 18 20 21 21
22

Specification of maintenance intervals Maintenance schedule, IRB 940 Tricept


Section B: Daily maintenance

22 23
24

Daily maintenance, complete robot

24

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Table of Contents

Section C: Lubrication activities

25

Lubrication, linear bearings Lubrication, actuators


Section D: Replacement activities

25 27
29

Replacement of filter element, OP-unit Adjusting the overpressure unit Chapter 4: Maintenance activities, controller Introduction
Section A: Maintenance intervals

29 31 33 33
34

Specification of maintenance intervals Maintenance schedule, controller S4CPlus


Section B: Inspection activities

34 35
36

Inspection of controller cabinet, S4Cplus


Section C: Replacement activities

36
37

Replacement of air filter, controller Replacement of battery unit, controller Replacement of system fan unit
Section D: Cleaning activities

37 40 44
47

Cleaning of controller cabinet Cleaning of air filter Chapter 5: Disposal Disposal

47 49 51 51

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] ii document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will 3HAC 16639-1 The delete

Overview

About This Manual

This information product is a manual containing instructions for maintenance of the complete robot system, mechanically as well as electrically.

Usage

This manual should be used during maintenance work.

Who Should Read This Manual?

This manual is intended for:


maintenance personnel in the user's organization. maintenance personnel in other organizations.

Prerequisites

The reader should...


be a trained maintenance craftsman have the required knowledge of mechanical maintenance work OR have the required knowledge of electrical maintenance work.

Organization of Chapters

The information product is organized in the following chapters:

Chapter
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Contents
Safety, service Reference information Maintenance activities, manipulator Maintenance activities, controller Disposal

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

References Reference
Circuit diagram, Manipulator Circuit diagram, Controller

Document Id
3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual part 2 3HAC 16640-1, Repair Manual part 2

Revisions Revision
-

Description
First edition

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 2 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16639-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Product Documentation, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The complete documentation of IRB 940 Tricept including controller consists of several manuals listed below:

Overview, Installation and Commissioning Manual

The Installation and Commissioning Manual contains the following main chapters:
Safety, Service Reference Information Unpacking On-site Installation Electrical connections Start-up Robot controller Installation of controller software System directory structure Calibration

Overview, Repair Manual

The Repair Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information Remove/Refitting instructions for all manipulator details considered spare parts Remove/Refitting instructions for all controller cabinet details considered spare parts Circuit Diagram for manipulator Circuit Diagram for controller cabinet

Overview, Maintenance Manual

The Maintenance Manual contains the following main chapters:


Safety, Service Reference Information

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Maintenance schedules Maintenance activities Disposal

The chapters for the maintenance activities include instructions for all the maintenance activities specified in the maintenance schedule.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 4 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16639-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service

Chapter 1:Safety, service


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details safety information for service personnel i.e. personnel performing installation, repair and maintenance work.

Sections

The chapter "Safety, service" is divided into the following sections: A. References contains lists of:
Limitation of liability applicable safety standards referenced documents

B. Safety risks lists dangers relevant when servicing the robot system. The dangers are split into different categories:
Safety risks related to end effector Safety risks related to tools/workpieces Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems Safety risks during operational disturbances Safety risks during installation and service Risks associated with live electric parts

C. Safety actions details actions which may be taken to remedy or avoid dangers.
Safety fence dimensions Fire extinguishing Emergency release of the manipulators arm Brake testing Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s" Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit enabling device Work inside the manipulators working range

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service

Safety, service - General

Validity and responsibility

The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete system, nor does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety of the total system. To protect personnel, the complete system must be designed and installed in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the standards and regulations of the country where the robot is installed. The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable safety laws and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the safety devices necessary to protect people working with the robot system have been designed and installed correctly. Personnel working with robots must be familiar with the operation and handling of the industrial robot, described in the applicable documents, e.g. Users Guide and Product Manual.

Connection of external safety devices

Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external safety function can interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This means that control signals can act on safety signals received from the peripheral equipment as well as from the robot. In the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning, instructions are provided for connecting safety devices between the robot and the peripheral equipment.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 6 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16639-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
References

Section A: References Limitation of Liability

General

Any information given in this information product regarding safety, must not be construed as a warranty by ABB Robotics that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if all safety instructions have been complied with.

Applicable Safety Standards

Standards

The robot is designed in accordance with the requirements of:


EN 292-1, Safety of macheniry, basic terminology EN 292-2, Safety of machinery, technical principles/specifications, emergency stop EN 418, Safety of machinery, emergency stop equipment EN 563, Safety of machinery, temperatures of surfaces EN 614-1, Safety of machinery, ergonomic design principles EN 775, Robot safety EN 60204-1, Electrical equipment for industrial machines EN 50081-2EMC, Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment (EN 55011 Class ARadiated emission enclosure) (EN 55011 Class AConducted emission AC Mains) EN 61000-6-2EMC, Generic standards - Immunity for Industrial environments (EN 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-3Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test) (EN 61000-4-4Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test) (EN 61000-4-5Surge immunity test) (EN 61000-4-6Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields) (EN 61000-4-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity test)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
References

Related information

General

The list below specifies documents which contain useful information:

Documents Type of information


Installation of safety devices Changing robot modes

Detailed in document
Installation and Commissioning Manual User s Guide

Section

Start-up

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 8 document is for study only,if tort to your 3HAC 16639-1 The rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Section B: Safety risks Safety risks related to end effector


Make sure to prevent an end effector from dropping a workpiece, if such is used.

Safety risks related to tools/workpieces

Safe handling

It must be possible to turn off tools, such as milling cutters, etc., safely. Make sure that guards remain closed until the cutters stop rotating. It should be possible to release parts by manual operation (valves).

Safe design

Grippers/end effectors must be designed so that they retain workpieces in the event of a power failure or a disturbance of the controller.

Safety risks related to pneumatic/hydraulic systems

General

Special safety regulations apply to pneumatic and hydraulic systems.

Residual energy

Residual energy may be present in these systems so, after shutdown, particular care must be taken. The pressure in pneumatic and hydraulic systems must be released before starting to repair them. Note that the interior of the robot may be pressurized.

Safe design

Gravity may cause any parts or objects held by these systems to drop. Dump valves should be used in case of emergency. Shot bolts should be used to prevent tools, etc., from falling due to gravity.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

Safety, service
Safety risks

Safety risks during operational disturbances

General

The industrial robot is a flexible tool which can be used in many different industrial applications. All work must be carried out professionally and in accordance with the applicable safety regulations. Care must be taken at all times.

Qualified personnel

Remedial action must only be carried out by qualified personnel who are familiar with the entire installation as well as the special risks associated with its different parts.

Extraordinary risks

If the working process is interrupted, extra care must be taken due to risks other than those associated with regular operation. Such an interruption may have to be rectified manually.

Safety risks during installation and service

General risks during installation and service

The instructions in the Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning must always be followed. Emergency stop buttons must be positioned in easily accessible places so that the robot can be stopped quickly. Those in charge of operations must make sure that safety instructions are available for the installation in question. Those who install the robot must have the appropriate training for the robot system in question and in any safety matters associated with it.

Nation/region specific regulations

To prevent injuries and damage during the installation, lifting and transport of the robot system, the regulations applicable in the country concerned and the instructions of ABB Robotics must be complied with.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 10 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety risks

Non-voltage related risks

Safety zones, which have to be crossed before admittance, must be set up in front of the robot's working space. Light beams or sensitive mats are suitable devices. Turntables or the like should be used to keep the operator out of the robot's working space. The axes are affected by the force of gravity when the brakes are released or when the motors or other components are removed. When dismantling/assembling mechanical units, watch out for falling objects. Be aware of stored heat energy in the controller. Never use the robot as a ladder, i.e. do not climb on the robot motors or other parts during service work. There is a serious risk of slipping because of the high temperature of the motors or oil spills that can occur on the robot.

To be observed by the supplier of the complete system

The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the safety function are interlocked in accordance with the applicable standards for that function. The supplier of the complete system must ensure that all circuits used in the emergency stop function are interlocked in a safe manner, in accordance with the applicable standards for the emergency stop function.

Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related risks, general

Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, have to be carried out while the power supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the mains switch to OFF) when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads and disconnecting or connecting units. The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can be turned off outside the robots working space.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

11

Safety, service
Safety risks

Voltage related risks, controller, S4Cplus

A danger of high voltage is associated with the following parts:


Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link) in the controller. Units inside the controller, e.g. I/O modules, can be supplied with power from an external source. The mains supply/mains switch The power unit The power supply unit for the computer system (230 VAC) The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. N.B.: Capacitors!) The drive unit (700 VDC) The service outlets (115/230 VAC) The power supply unit for tools, or special power supply units for the machining process The external voltage connected to the control cabinet remains live even when the robot is disconnected from the mains. Additional connections

Voltage related risks, manipulator, IRB 940 Tricept

A danger of high voltage is associated with the manipulator in:


The distribution box for the manipulator (up to 430 VDC) The power supply for the motors (up to 430 VDC) The user connections for tools or other parts of the installation (max. 230V AC, see Product Manual - Installation and Commissioning)

Voltage related risks, tools, material handling devices, etc.

Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in the OFF position. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working process may be damaged.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 12 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Section C: Safety actions Safety fence dimensions

General

Install a safety cell around the robot to ensure safe robot installation and operation.

Dimensioning the fence or enclosure

Design the safety cell such that it will:


- withstand any impact from a tool failure. Due to the high kinetic energy associated with HSM (High Speed Machining), a tool failure poses a serious risk as any debris can cause serious personal injury. Both walls and ceilings must be designed and dimensioned so that they can withstand any projectiles that they may be subjected to. Windows must be made from suitable safety glass. Study the planned process to determine the forces involved and appropriate materials. - insulate against sound pollution from the machining process. Typically the safety cell should be able to reduce sound from the machining process down to 75dBA, though individual installations may stipulate other values. Study the planned process to determine the allowable noise pollution levels and appropriate sound insulation. - isolate gases and mist generated by the machining process and spray mist lubrication. Study the planned process to determine the fumes involved and appropriate ventilation/filtering system.

Fire extinguishing
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO 2 ) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot (manipulator or controller)!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

13

Safety, service
Safety actions

Emergency release of the manipulators arm

Description

In an emergency situation, any of the manipulators axes may be released manually by pushing the brake release buttons on the distribution box for the manipulator. How to release the brakes is detailed in section "Manually releasing the brakes" in the Installation Manual. The manipulator arms may be moved manually when the brakes has been released.

Increased injury

Before releasing the brakes, make sure that the weight of the arms does not increase the pressure on the trapped person, further increasing any injury!

Brake testing

When to test

During operation the holding brakes of each axis motor wear normally. A test may be performed to determine whether the brake can still perform its function.

How to test

The function of each axis motor holding brakes may be checked as detailed below: 1. Run each manipulator axis to a position where the combined weight of the manipulator arm and any load is maximized (max. static load). 2. Switch the motor to the MOTORS OFF position with the Operating mode selector on the controller. 3. Check that the axis maintains its position.
If the manipulator does not change position as the motors are switched off, then the brake function is adequate.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 14 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Safety, service
Safety actions

Risk of disabling function "Reduced speed 250 mm/s"


Do not change "Transm gear ratio" or other kinematic parameters from the Teach Pendant Unit or a PC. This will affect the safety function Reduced speed 250 mm/s.

Safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit


The enabling device is a push button located on the side of the Teach Pendant Unit (TPU) which, when pressed halfway in, takes the system to MOTORS ON. When the enabling device is released or pushed all the way in, the robot is taken to the MOTORS OFF state. To ensure safe use of the Teach Pendant Unit, the following must be implemented: The enabling device must never be rendered inoperative in any way. During programming and testing, the enabling device must be released as soon as there is no need for the robot to move. The programmer must always bring the Teach Pendant Unit with him/her, when entering the robots working space. This is to prevent anyone else taking control over the robot without the programmer knowing.

Work inside the manipulators working range


If work must be carried out within the robots work envelope, the following points must be observed: The operating mode selector on the controller must be in the manual mode position to render the enabling device operative and to block operation from a computer link or remote control panel. The robots speed is limited to max. 250 mm/s when the operating mode selector is in position < 250 mm/s. This should be the normal position when entering the working space. The position 100% full speed may only be used by trained personnel who are aware of the risks that this entails. Also be aware of any danger that may be caused by rotating tools or other devices mounted on the manipulator or inside the cell.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

15

Safety, service
Safety actions

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 16 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Chapter 2:Reference Information


Introduction

General

This chapter presents generic pieces of information, complementing the more specific information in the following chapters.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

17

Reference Information

Screw joints

General

This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints in the manipulator as well as the controller. The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprising metallic materials and does not apply to soft or brittle materials. Any instructions given in the repair, maintenance or installation procedure description override any value or procedure given here, i.e. these instruction are only valid for standard type screw joints.

Tightening torque

The tightening torque values for different types of screw joint are specified in the tables below:

Screws with slotted or cross recess head

Dimension
M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 4.8 "dry"


0.25 0.5 1.2 2.5 5.0

Screws with hexagon socket head

Dimension
M5 M6 M8 M10 M12

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


6 10 24 47 82

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


28 55 95

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


17 40 70 120

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 18 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Reference Information

Dimension
M16

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 8.8 "dry"


200

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 10.9


235

Tightening torque (Nm) Class 12.9


300

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

19

Reference Information

Weight specifications

Definition

In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are sometimes specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in this way. ABB recommends handling all components with a weight exceeding 22 kg using lifting equipment to avoid inflicting injury.

Example

Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:


The actuator with motor weighs 40 kg! All lifting equipment used must be dimensioned accordingly!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 20 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator

Chapter 3:Maintenance activities, manipulator


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all maintenance activities recommended for the manipulator. This chapter is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific maintenance activity. Each unit contains all the information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

21

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Maintenance intervals

Section A: Maintenance intervals Specification of maintenance intervals

Description

The intervals may be specified in different ways depending on the type of maintenance activity to be carried out and the working conditions of the robot.
Calendar time: specified in months regardless of whether the robot system is run or not. Operating time: specified in operating hours. More frequent running of the robot means more frequent maintenance activities.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 22 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Maintenance intervals

Maintenance schedule, IRB 940 Tricept

General

The robot, consisting of manipulator and controller cabinet, must be maintained regularly to ensure its function. The maintenance activities and their respective intervals are specified in the table below. Non-predictable situations also give rise to inspections of the robot. If damage is discovered, attend to it immediately!

Activities and intervals

The section referred to in the table can be found in the different chapters for every maintenance activity. The table below specifies the required maintenance activities and intervals:

Maintenance activity
Daily maintenance Lubrication Lubrication Changing Changing

Equipment
Complete robot Linear bearings Actuator Filter, overpressure unit Battery, distribution box

Interval
Daily 1000h
1

Detailed in section
"Daily maintenance" "Lubrication, linear bearings" "Lubrication, actuators" Replacement of filter element, OP-unit Removal/Refitting of battery, distribution box in the Repair Manual.

1000h 1

1)

The interval is based on utilization under normal operating conditions. Operation under severe conditions such as increased ambient temperature or the presence of abrasive or grease absorbent dust will require a more regular maintenance cycle.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

23

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Daily maintenance

Section B: Daily maintenance Daily maintenance, complete robot

General

The IRB 940 Tricept requires regular maintenance. It is therefore important to adhere to the following maintenance chart as well as applying the preventive maintenance schedules set out in any auxiliary equipment chapters. When maintaining the robot it is important to:
Clean the robot and its surrounding environment daily. Not to use compressed air in sections of the machinery which may suffer from chips or dust being blown into sensitive areas. Only use soft cloths when cleaning so as not to cause abrasions on the machine surfaces. Not to use any solvents that may have an abrasive or corrosive effect on the machine surfaces.

Daily maintenance

The daily maintenance of the robot and its surrounding environment includes:
Removing all chips and/or dust that result from the machining process. Performing checks on all safety related equipment such as safety switches and barriers. Checking for signs of damage or wear on all cables, hoses and other components that can lead to a safety risk or interrupted production in case of failure. Checking levels of all lubrication and cooling fluids on both the manipulator and auxiliary equipment. Checking that all media supplies, such as compressed air and water, maintain the correct pressures and flows.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 24 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Section C: Lubrication activities Lubrication, linear bearings

Location

The figure below shows the location of the grease lubrication nipple on the linear guide bearing. The other linear bearing is located on the other side of the center tube.

xx0200000293

Grease lubrication nipple (one on either side of the center tube)

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Lubricant

Note

Klber Isoflex NBU 15 2 x 4 ml per linear bearing.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

25

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication

The procedure below details how to lubricate the linear bearings.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before lubrication, always clean lubrication interfaces to prevent contamination entering the lubrication system. - After lubrication, always clean any spillage around lubrication interfaces.

Step
1. 2.

Action
Clean the rails from old grease and dust.

Note/Illustration

Apply 4 ml lubricant through the nipple at the Shown in figure above! bottom end of the linear guide bearing. Lubricant specified Both sides must be lubricated! above! Note! The ends of the linear bearing are made from plastic and can crack if not sufficient care is taken when lubricating the bearings. Run the robot back and forth in the Z-direction several times. Apply a further 4 ml lubricant through the same nipples at both side of the center tube.

3. 4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 26 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication, actuators

Location

The three actuators require lubrication with grease. There are four separate grease nipples for the lubrication on each actuator. The grease nipple that faces up is used so that as the grease is applied it falls onto the lead screw inside the actuator housing. The figure below shows the location of the grease lubrication nipples on the actuator.

xx0200000294

Grease lubrication nipples on the actuator

Required equipment Equipment, etc. Spare part no. Art. no.


Lubricant Klberplex BEM 34-132

Note
2 x 4 ml per actuator. For lubrication of the actuators.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

27

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Lubrication activities

Lubrication

The procedure below details how to lubricate the actuators.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the manipulator: - Some parts are HOT after running the robot, e.g. motors and lights! Burns may result from touching them! - Turn off all electrical power, hydraulic and pneumatic pressure supplies to the robot! - When replacing motors/reducers, make sure that those parts of the robot which could move unexpectedly are mechanically blocked as specified in the individual procedures. - Before lubrication, always clean lubrication interfaces to prevent contamination entering the lubrication system. - After lubrication, always clean any spillage around lubrication interfaces.

Step
1.

Action
Extend the actuators to their maximum allowable length. If a fixture or other work area restrictions affect the positioning of the robot, run it so that one of the actuators is extended, lubricate it and move on to the other two in turn. Apply 4 ml of lubricant to each actuator through the topmost grease nipple. Note! Ensure that the grease nipple that faces upwards is used, as any other orientated grease nipple will not ensure that the grease is applied to the lead screw correctly. Run the actuators through their whole stroke several times. Note! The actuators must be extended prior to lubrication in order to get the correct application onto the actuator screw. Lubricating a contracted actuator will not apply any grease on the screw threads. Apply a further 4 ml through the same grease nipple.

Note/Illustration

2.

Lubricant specified above! Shown in the figure above!

3.

4.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 28 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Section D: Replacement activities Replacement of filter element, OP-unit

Location

The filter element is located in the overpressure (OP) unit as shown in the figure below.

xx0200000420

Removal of the filter element

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Filter

Spare part no.


3HAC 17158-1

Art. no.

Note

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

29

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Replacement of filter

The procedure below details how to replace the filter element in the overpressure unit.

Step
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Action
Exhaust the system and the unit. Unscrew the filter bowl in an anti-clockwise direction. Grasp a new filter element only at the lower end. Refit the parts in the reverse order from dismantling. Recommission the overpressure unit.

Note/Illustration

Detailed in the section "Adjusting the overpressure unit".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 30 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Adjusting the overpressure unit

Location

The overpressure unit is installed as shown in figure below.

C
xx0200000421

A B C D

Regulator Pressure guard Pressure indicator light Air input

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

31

Maintenance activities, manipulator


Replacement activities

Adjusting

The procedure below details how to adjust the overpressure unit after installation or after replacement of the filter element.

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Slowly pressurize the complete system. Pull the pressure setting button upwards (away from the housing). Turn the pressure setting until the desired pressure (1 bar) is shown on the manometer. The input pressure must be at least 1 bar greater than the output pressure. Press the pressure setting button downwards (towards the housing) to secure it against unintentional turning.

Note/Illustration

4.

The output pressure must under no circumstances exceed 1 bar!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 32 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller

Chapter 4:Maintenance activities, controller


Introduction

Definitions

This chapter details all maintenance activities recommended for the control cabinet. This chapter is made up of separate units, each detailing a specific maintenance activity. Each unit contains all the information required to perform the activity, e.g. spare parts numbers, required special tools and materials.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

33

Maintenance activities, controller


Maintenance intervals

Section A: Maintenance intervals Specification of maintenance intervals

Description

The intervals may be specified in different ways depending on the type of maintenance activity to be carried out and the working conditions of the robot.
Calendar time: specified in months regardless of whether the robot system is run or not. Operating time: specified in operating hours. More frequent running of the robot means more frequent maintenance activities.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 34 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Maintenance intervals

Maintenance schedule, controller S4CPlus

General

The robot controller must be maintained at regular intervals to ensure its function. The maintenance activities and their respective intervals are specified in the table below:

Intervals Maintenance activity


Inspection Cleaning Cleaning Replacement Replacement Replacement

Equipment
Controller cabinet Controller cabinet Air filter Air filter Battery unit System fan unit

Interval
6 mths

Detailed in section
"Inspection, controller cabinet" "Cleaning, controller cabinet" "Cleaning, air filter"

4 000 h/ 24 mths 1 12 000 h/ 36 mths 1 60 mths

"Replacement, air filter" "Replacement, battery unit" "Replacement, system fan unit".

1)

Hours denotes operational time whereas months denotes actual calender time.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

35

Maintenance activities, controller


Inspection activities

Section B: Inspection activities Inspection of controller cabinet, S4Cplus

Inspection

The procedure below details how to inspect the controller cabinet.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1.

Action

Note/Illustration

Inspect the cabinet interior to make sure Replace any faulty seals there is no contamination. as required. If any contamination is found, the cabinet interior must be cleaned and all gaskets and seals to the cabinet inspected. Inspect all sealing joints and cable glands to make sure they are airtight in order to prevent dust and dirt from being sucked into the cabinet. Inspect connectors and cabling to make sure they are securely fastened and cabling not damaged. Inspect any air filters to make sure they are clean. Inspect any fans to make sure they function correctly. Clean any contaminated filters as detailed in "Cleaning, air filter". Replace any malfunctioning fans as detailed in their sections respectively.

2.

3.

4.

5.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 36 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Section C: Replacement activities Replacement of air filter, controller

Location of air filter

The air filter is located in the air filter magazine in the front hatch.

A
xx0200000284

Air filter magazine

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Air filter Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAB 8028-1

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

37

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Removal, air filter

The procedure below details how to remove the air filter.

Step
1.

Action
Open the bottom of the air filter magazine as shown in the figure.

Note/Illustration

xx0200000001

2. 3.

Unlock the lower springs. Lower the magazine and remove. Remove the old filter by releasing the lock shackle and lifting it. Note! In cases of less contamination, the air filter may be cleaned and refitted. The procedure for this is detailed in section "Cleaning the air filter, controller" in the Maintenance Manual.
xx0200000003

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 38 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Refitting, air filter

The procedure below details how to refit the air filter.

Step
1. 2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the air filter in the Art. no. is specified above! magazine. Fit the spring at the top of the air filter magazine into the cabinet door and push upwards inwards. Push until the lower springs snap into the cabinet door.

xx0200000006

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

39

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Replacement of battery unit, controller

Location of battery unit

The battery unit is located at the bottom of the controller.

A
xx0200000103

Battery unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 40 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Battery unit Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art no.


3HAC 5393-2

Note
To be replaced as a complete unit These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal, battery unit

The procedure below details how to remove the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

41

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Step
1.

Action
Remove the battery unit by unscrewing its attachment screws (1).

Note/Illustration

X1

X1

X1

X1

X2

X2

X2

X2

X3

xx0200000004

2. 3.

Pull the battery unit out (2). Disconnect the three cables from the battery unit (3).

xx0200000005

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 42 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Refitting, battery unit

The procedure below details how to refit the battery unit.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Place the battery unit close to its position. Reconnect the cables (3) and push the unit into position. Secure it with the attachment screws (1).

Note/Illustration
Art. no. specified above! See illustration above! See illustration above! See illustration above!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

43

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Replacement of system fan unit

Location of system fan unit

The system fan unit is located as shown in the figure below.

A D A A A B

xx0200000007

A B C D E

Drive units Bleeder resistor unit System fan unit Rectifier (drive unit) Power supply unit

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 44 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


System fan unit Other tools and procedures may be required. See references to these procedures in the step-by-step instructions below.

Spare part no. Art. no.


3HAC 12924-2

Note
These procedures include references to the tools required.

Removal

The procedure below details how to remove the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action
Remove the bleeder resistor unit. Disconnect the cable (see position 1 in the figure).

Note/Illustration
Detailed in "Replacement of bleeder resistor" in the Repair Manual.

xx0200000008

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

45

Maintenance activities, controller


Replacement activities

Step
3.

Action
Pull the back of the system fan unit upwards to free it and then tip it out of the enclosure (see position 2 in the figure).

Note/Illustration

Refitting

The procedure below details how to refit the system fan unit.
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action

Note/Illustration

Fit the system fan unit into position and Art. no. specified above! secure it (see position 2 in the figure above). Reconnect the cable disconnected during disassembly (see position 1 in the figure above). Refit the bleeder resistor unit. Detailed in section "Replacement of bleeder resistor" in the Repairs Manual.

3.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 46 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Section D: Cleaning activities Cleaning of controller cabinet

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Vacuum cleaner Cleaning agent, exterior cleaning Use rag with e.g. alcohol, if necessary

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note

Cleaning of functional components

The procedure below details how to clean the functional components of the controller cabinet.

Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the controller: Turn off all electric power supplies to the cabinet! Many components inside the cabinet are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic Discharge) and will be destroyed if subjected to it! Before handling, make sure you are connected to earth through a special ESD wrist bracelet or similar. Many module and unit fronts are fitted with a special ESD protection button for connection of the bracelet. Use it!

Step
1. 2.

Action
Clean the cabinet interior with a vacuum cleaner if necessary. If the cabinet is equipped with heat exchangers, it is of the utmost importance that these are cleaned. Heat exchangers are normally found: on the rear of power supplies on the rear of computer modules on drive units

Note/Illustration

If required, remove any heat exchangers before cleaning as detailed in the "Repair Manual".

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

47

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Dos and donts!

The section below specifies special considerations when cleaning the controller cabinet.

Always!

Always use cleaning equipment as specified above! Any other cleaning equipment may shorten the life of paintwork, rust inhibitors, signs, or labels! Always check that all protective covers are fitted to the controller before cleaning!

Never!

Never remove any covers or other protective before cleaning the controller! Never use any cleaning agents, e.g. compressed air or solvents, other than those specified above! Never spray with a high pressure cleaner!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 48 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Cleaning of air filter

Location of air filter

The air filter is located as shown in the figure below:


B C

A
xx0200000002

A B C D E

Air filter I/O and gateway units Power supply unit Drive system Computer system

Required equipment Equipment, etc.


Cleaning agent

Spare part no. Art. no.

Note
Water 30-40C with washing-up liquid or detergent

Compressed air

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

49

Maintenance activities, controller


Cleaning activities

Cleaning

The procedure below details how to clean the air filter.


Please observe the following before commencing any repair work: Turn off all electric power supplies to the robot! Take any necessary measures to ensure that the manipulator does not collapse as parts are removed, e.g. securing the lower arm with fixtures before removing gearbox, axis 2.

Step
1. 2. 3.

Action
Clean with the rough surface (on the clean-air side) turned inwards. Clean the filter three or four times. Allow the filter to dry in one of these ways: Lying flat on a flat surface Blow dry with compressed air from the clean-air side.

Note/Illustration

Do not wring the filter out!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 50 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Disposal

Chapter 5:Disposal
Disposal

General

All used grease/oils and dead batteries must be disposed of in accordance with the current legislation of the country in which the robot and the control unit have been installed. If the robot or the control unit is partially or completely disposed of, the various parts must be grouped together according to their nature (e.g. all iron together and all plastic together), and disposed of accordingly. These parts must also be disposed of in accordance with the current legislation of the country in which the robot and control unit have been installed.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 - rights,please inform us,we will delete The document is for study only,if tort to your

51

Disposal

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 52 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

53

Index

www.cadfamily.com EMail:[email protected] 54 3HAC 16639-1 The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

You might also like